(process_sent_to): New variable.
[bpt/emacs.git] / etc / NEWS
CommitLineData
d1e68bce 1GNU Emacs NEWS -- history of user-visible changes. 2000-09-17
424d8b44 2Copyright (C) 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
3See the end for copying conditions.
4
5Please send Emacs bug reports to bug-gnu-emacs@gnu.org.
3787e12e 6For older news, see the file ONEWS
a933dad1
DL
7
8\f
251584f3
DL
9* Installation Changes in Emacs 21.1
10
f4988be7
GM
11** Support for GNU/Linux on IA64 machines has been added.
12
424d8b44
DL
13** Support for LynxOS has been added.
14
1fa28578
GM
15** `movemail' defaults to supporting POP. You can turn this off using
16the --without-pop configure option, should that be necessary.
17
18** There are new configure options associated with the support for
163ea954
RS
19images and toolkit scrollbars. Use the --help option in `configure'
20to list them.
6344985d 21
d5483ab1 22** There is a new configure option `--without-xim' that instructs
d874e913 23Emacs to not use X Input Methods (XIM), if these are available.
5ed8d5af
DL
24
25** There is a new configure option `--disable-largefile' to omit
26Unix-98-style support for large files if that is available.
27
28** You can build a 64-bit Emacs for SPARC/Solaris systems which
29support 64-bit executables. See etc/MACHINES for instructions.
f4988be7 30
1fa28578
GM
31\f
32* Changes in Emacs 21.1
33
f393cf90
DL
34** Gnus changes.
35
36The Gnus NEWS entries are short, but they reflect sweeping changes in
37four areas: Article display treatment, MIME treatment,
38internationalization and mail-fetching.
39
40*** The mail-fetching functions have changed. See the manual for the
41many details. In particular, all procmail fetching variables are gone.
42
43If you used procmail like in
44
45(setq nnmail-use-procmail t)
46(setq nnmail-spool-file 'procmail)
47(setq nnmail-procmail-directory "~/mail/incoming/")
48(setq nnmail-procmail-suffix "\\.in")
49
50this now has changed to
51
52(setq mail-sources
53 '((directory :path "~/mail/incoming/"
54 :suffix ".in")))
55
56More information is available in the info doc at Select Methods ->
57Getting Mail -> Mail Sources
58
59*** Gnus is now a MIME-capable reader. This affects many parts of
60Gnus, and adds a slew of new commands. See the manual for details.
61
62*** Gnus has also been multilingualized. This also affects too
63many parts of Gnus to summarize here, and adds many new variables.
64
65*** gnus-auto-select-first can now be a function to be
66called to position point.
67
68*** The user can now decide which extra headers should be included in
69summary buffers and NOV files.
70
71*** `gnus-article-display-hook' has been removed. Instead, a number
72of variables starting with `gnus-treat-' have been added.
73
74*** The Gnus posting styles have been redone again and now work in a
75subtly different manner.
76
77*** New web-based backends have been added: nnslashdot, nnwarchive
78and nnultimate. nnweb has been revamped, again, to keep up with
79ever-changing layouts.
80
81*** Gnus can now read IMAP mail via nnimap.
82
83*** There is image support.
84
85** When your terminal can't display characters from some of the ISO
d1e68bce
DL
868859 character sets but can display Latin-1, you can display
87more-or-less mnemonic sequences of ASCII/Latin-1 characters instead of
88empty boxes (under a window system) or question marks (not under a
89window system). Customize the option `latin1-display' to turn this
90on.
91
ba9eeda1
GM
92** The new user-option `find-file-suppress-same-file-warnings' can be
93set to suppress warnings ``X and Y are the same file'' when visiting a
94file that is already visited under a different name.
95
96** The Strokes package has been updated. If your Emacs has XPM
dab96841
DL
97support, you can use it for pictographic editing. In Strokes mode,
98use C-mouse-2 to compose a complex stoke and insert it into the
99buffer. You can encode or decode a strokes buffer with new commands
100M-x strokes-encode-buffer and M-x strokes-decode-buffer. There is a
101new command M-x strokes-list-strokes.
102
b941a14b 103+++
ba9eeda1 104** New command M-x describe-character-set reads a character set name
b941a14b
KH
105and displayes information about that.
106
ba9eeda1 107** When an error is signaled during the loading of the user's init
83b6997f
GM
108file, Emacs now pops up the *Messages* buffer.
109
d7b38c05 110** Polish and German translations of Emacs' reference card have been
6917e6bb 111added. They are named `pl-refcard.tex' and `de-refcard.tex'.
d7b38c05
GM
112Postscript files are included.
113
114** A reference card for Dired has been added. Its name is
115`dired-ref.tex'.
116
25ad1371
GM
117** The new variable `auto-mode-interpreter-regexp' contains a regular
118expression matching interpreters, for file mode determination.
119
120This regular expression is matched against the first line of a file to
121determine the file's mode in `set-auto-mode' when Emacs can't deduce a
122mode from the file's name. If it matches, the file is assumed to be
123interpreted by the interpreter matched by the second group of the
124regular expression. The mode is then determined as the mode
125associated with that interpreter in `interpreter-mode-alist'.
126
424d8b44 127+++
f0298744
DL
128** C-down-mouse-3 is bound differently. Now if the menu bar is not
129displayed it pops up a menu containing the items which would be on the
130menu bar. If the menu bar is displayed, it pops up the major mode
131menu or the Edit menu if there is no major mode menu.
132
9a8d84ca
DL
133** Variable `load-path' is no longer customizable because it contains
134a version-dependent component.
135
d76c03ea
GM
136** The <delete> function key is now bound to `delete-char' by default.
137Note that this takes effect only on window systems. On TTYs, Emacs
138will receive ASCII 127 when the DEL key is pressed. This
139character is still bound as before.
140
3b4fa1b2
DL
141** Item Save Options on the Options menu allows saving options set
142using that menu.
143
40e857ea 144** New function executable-make-buffer-file-executable-if-script-p is
424d8b44 145suitable as an after-save-hook as an alternative to `executable-chmod'.
40e857ea 146
beb2eb00 147+++
c08398de
DL
148** The most preferred coding-system is now used to save a buffer if
149buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and it is safe for the buffer
150contents. (The most preferred is set by set-language-environment or
151by M-x prefer-coding-system.) Thus if you visit an ASCII file and
152insert a non-ASCII character from your current language environment,
153the file will be saved silently with the appropriate coding.
154Previously you would be prompted for a safe coding system.
155
db7a3ede 156+++
3d6cd763
GM
157** New variable `inhibit-iso-escape-detection' determines if Emacs'
158coding system detection algorithm should pay attention to ISO2022's
159escape sequences. If this variable is non-nil, the algorithm ignores
160such escape sequences. The default value is nil, and it is
161recommended not to change it except for the special case that you
07b14857 162always want to read any escape code verbatim. If you just want to
3d6cd763 163read a specific file without decoding escape codes, use C-x RET c
07b14857
KH
164(`universal-coding-system-argument'). For instance, C-x RET c latin-1
165RET C-x C-f filename RET.
26ae8525 166
0b8a3a6d
DL
167** Variable `default-korean-keyboard' is initialized properly from the
168environment variable `HANGUL_KEYBOARD_TYPE'.
169
424d8b44 170+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
171** C-u C-x = provides detailed information about the character at
172point in a pop-up window.
173
6d35b49f 174+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
175** New command M-x list-charset-chars reads a character set name and
176displays all characters in that character set.
177
178** M-x set-terminal-coding-system (C-x RET t) now allows CCL-based
179coding systems such as cpXXX and cyrillic-koi8.
180
a4067978 181+++
5cb6a58e 182** M-; now calls comment-dwim which tries to do something clever based
a4067978
EZ
183on the context. M-x kill-comment is now an alias to comment-kill,
184defined on newcomment.el.
5cb6a58e 185
424d8b44 186+++
a1b8d58b
GM
187** The function `getenv' is now callable interactively.
188
6e417ca5
DL
189** The many obsolete language `setup-...-environment' commands have
190been removed -- use `set-language-environment'.
191
424d8b44 192+++
5898e075
DL
193** New user options `display-time-mail-face' and
194`display-time-use-mail-icon' control the appearance of mode-line mail
195indicator used by the display-time package. On a suitable display the
196indicator can be an icon and is mouse-sensitive.
197
424d8b44 198+++
abfcc168
GM
199** Emacs' auto-save list files are now by default stored in a
200sub-directory `.emacs.d/auto-save-list/' of the user's home directory.
874d1079 201(On MS-DOS, this subdirectory's name is `_emacs.d/auto-save.list/'.)
abfcc168
GM
202You can customize `auto-save-list-prefix' to change this location.
203
424d8b44 204+++
cc181e95
GM
205** On window-systems, additional space can be put between text lines
206on the display using several methods
207
424d8b44 208+++
cc181e95
GM
209- By setting frame parameter `line-spacing' to PIXELS. PIXELS must be
210a positive integer, and specifies that PIXELS number of pixels should
211be put below text lines on the affected frame or frames.
212
424d8b44 213+++
cc181e95
GM
214- By setting X resource `lineSpacing', class `LineSpacing'. This is
215equivalent ot specifying the frame parameter.
216
da4496b6 217- By specifying `--line-spacing=N' or `-lsp N' on the command line.
cc181e95
GM
218
219- By setting buffer-local variable `line-spacing'. The meaning is
220the same, but applies to the a particular buffer only.
221
424d8b44 222+++
3b4fa1b2 223** The new command `clone-indirect-buffer' can be used to create
1c459486 224an indirect buffer that is a twin copy of the current buffer. The
3b4fa1b2 225command `clone-indirect-buffer-other-window', bound to C-x 4 c,
1c459486 226does the same but displays the indirect buffer in another window.
0daee095 227
424d8b44 228+++
176256a1 229** New user options `backup-directory-alist' and
3bbc50af
DL
230`make-backup-file-name-function' control the placement of backups,
231typically in a single directory or in an invisible sub-directory.
176256a1 232
dd0add8e
DL
233** New commands iso-iso2sgml and iso-sgml2iso convert between Latin-1
234characters and the corresponding SGML (HTML) entities.
235
bf3ba9ac 236+++
699238d9
GM
237** Emacs now refuses to load compiled Lisp files which weren't
238compiled with Emacs. Set `load-dangerous-libraries' to t to change
239this behavior.
240
241The reason for this change is an incompatible change in XEmacs' byte
242compiler. Files compiled with XEmacs can contain byte codes that let
243Emacs dump core.
244
424d8b44 245+++
699238d9 246** New X resources recognized
100b3cbb 247
7233c5bd
GM
248*** The X resource `synchronous', class `Synchronous', specifies
249whether Emacs should run in synchronous mode. Synchronous mode
250is useful for debugging X problems.
251
252Example:
253
699238d9 254 emacs.synchronous: true
7233c5bd 255
100b3cbb
GM
256*** The X resource `visualClass, class `VisualClass', specifies the
257visual Emacs should use. The resource's value should be a string of
258the form `CLASS-DEPTH', where CLASS is the name of the visual class,
259and DEPTH is the requested color depth as a decimal number. Valid
260visual class names are
261
262 TrueColor
263 PseudoColor
264 DirectColor
265 StaticColor
266 GrayScale
267 StaticGray
268
269Visual class names specified as X resource are case-insensitive, i.e.
270`pseudocolor', `Pseudocolor' and `PseudoColor' all have the same
271meaning.
272
273The program `xdpyinfo' can be used to list the visual classes
274supported on your display, and which depths they have. If
275`visualClass' is not specified, Emacs uses the display's default
276visual.
277
278Example:
279
699238d9 280 emacs.visualClass: TrueColor-8
100b3cbb
GM
281
282*** The X resource `privateColormap', class `PrivateColormap',
283specifies that Emacs should use a private colormap if it is using the
284default visual, and that visual is of class PseudoColor. Recognized
285resource values are `true' or `on'.
286
287Example:
288
699238d9 289 emacs.privateColormap: true
100b3cbb 290
0d0c76b8
EZ
291** The menu bar configuration has changed. The new configuration is
292more CUA-compliant. The most significant change is that Options is
293now a separate menu-bar item, with Mule and Customize as its submenus.
294
42088c12 295** User-option `show-cursor-in-non-selected-windows' controls how to
c60ea02e 296display the cursor in non-selected windows. If nil, no cursor is
42088c12
GM
297shown, if non-nil a hollow box cursor is shown. This option can
298be customized.
c60ea02e 299
424d8b44 300+++
31047e0d
DL
301** The variable `echo-keystrokes' may now have a floating point value.
302
424d8b44 303+++
b02786f9
GM
304** C-x 5 1 runs the new command delete-other-frames which deletes
305all frames except the selected one.
306
3261c1d8
DL
307** If your init file is compiled (.emacs.elc), `user-init-file' is set
308to the source name (.emacs.el), if that exists, after loading it.
309
ffe36136 310** The help string specified for a menu-item whose definition contains
aa78a4f3
EZ
311the property `:help HELP' is now displayed under X, on MS-Windows, and
312MS-DOS, either in the echo area or with tooltips. Many standard menus
313displayed by Emacs now have help strings.
314
0292b49f 315+++
aa78a4f3
EZ
316** Highlighting of mouse-sensitive regions is now supported in the
317MS-DOS version of Emacs.
ffe36136 318
559cee90
DL
319** New user option `read-mail-command' specifies a command to use to
320read mail from the menu etc.
321
480b5773 322+++
271b4185
GM
323** Hexl contains a new command `hexl-insert-hex-string' which inserts
324a string of hexadecimal numbers read from the mini-buffer.
325
0daee095
GM
326** Changes in Texinfo mode.
327
328** A couple of new key bindings have been added for inserting Texinfo
329macros
330
331 Key binding Macro
332 -------------------------
333 C-c C-c C-s @strong
334 C-c C-c C-e @emph
335 C-c C-c u @url
336 C-c C-c q @quotation
337 C-c C-c m @email
338
559cee90
DL
339** Changes in Outline mode.
340
341There is now support for Imenu to index headings. A new command
342`outline-headers-as-kill' copies the visible headings in the region to
343the kill ring, e.g. to produce a table of contents.
344
7a912f63
GM
345** Changes to Emacs Server
346
c0a8c108
EZ
347+++
348*** The new option `server-kill-new-buffers' specifies what to do
7a912f63
GM
349with buffers when done with them. If non-nil, the default, buffers
350are killed, unless they were already present before visiting them with
351Emacs Server. If nil, `server-temp-file-regexp' specifies which
352buffers to kill, as before.
353
354Please note that only buffers are killed that still have a client,
c0a8c108 355i.e. buffers visited with `emacsclient --no-wait' are never killed in
7a912f63
GM
356this way.
357
956777b3
GM
358** Changes to Show Paren mode.
359
360*** Overlays used by Show Paren mode now use a priority property.
361The new user option show-paren-priority specifies the priority to
362use. Default is 1000.
363
f6989277 364+++
404fa7d6
DL
365** New command M-x check-parens can be used to find unbalanced paren
366groups and strings in buffers in Lisp mode (or other modes).
367
424d8b44
DL
368+++
369** You can now easily create new *Info* buffers using either
370M-x clone-buffer, C-u m <entry> RET or C-u g <entry> RET.
371M-x clone-buffer can also be used on *Help* and several other special
372buffers.
8964fec7 373
424d8b44 374+++
39783d73
WP
375** Emacs can now support 'wheeled' mice (such as the MS IntelliMouse)
376under XFree86. To enable this, simply put (mwheel-install) in your
377.emacs file.
378
379The variables `mwheel-follow-mouse' and `mwheel-scroll-amount'
380determine where and by how much buffers are scrolled.
381
d35fce81
GM
382** Listing buffers with M-x list-buffers (C-x C-b) now shows
383abbreviated file names. Abbreviations can be customized by changing
384`directory-abbrev-alist'.
385
a933dad1
DL
386** Faces and frame parameters.
387
388There are four new faces `scroll-bar', `border', `cursor' and `mouse'.
389Setting the frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
390`scroll-bar-background' sets foreground and background color of face
391`scroll-bar' and vice versa. Setting frame parameter `border-color'
392sets the background color of face `border' and vice versa. Likewise
393for frame parameters `cursor-color' and face `cursor', and frame
394parameter `mouse-color' and face `mouse'.
395
396Changing frame parameter `font' sets font-related attributes of the
397`default' face and vice versa. Setting frame parameters
79214ddf 398`foreground-color' or `background-color' sets the colors of the
a933dad1
DL
399`default' face and vice versa.
400
d80061fa 401+++
f77a4a8a
GM
402** New face `menu'.
403
404The face `menu' can be used to change colors and font of Emacs' menus.
405Setting the font of LessTif/Motif menus is currently not supported;
406attempts to set the font are ignored in this case.
407
424d8b44 408+++
a933dad1
DL
409** New frame parameter `screen-gamma' for gamma correction.
410
411The new frame parameter `screen-gamma' specifies gamma-correction for
412colors. Its value may be nil, the default, in which case no gamma
413correction occurs, or a number > 0, usually a float, that specifies
414the screen gamma of a frame's display.
415
416PC monitors usually have a screen gamma of 2.2. smaller values result
417in darker colors. You might want to try a screen gamma of 1.5 for LCD
418color displays. The viewing gamma Emacs uses is 0.4545. (1/2.2).
419
420The X resource name of this parameter is `screenGamma', class
421`ScreenGamma'.
422
423** Emacs has a new redisplay engine.
424
425The new redisplay handles characters of variable width and height.
426Italic text can be used without redisplay problems. Fonts containing
427oversized characters, i.e. characters larger than the logical height
428of a font can be used. Images of various formats can be displayed in
429the text.
430
431** Emacs has a new face implementation.
432
433The new faces no longer fundamentally use X font names to specify the
434font. Instead, each face has several independent attributes--family,
435height, width, weight and slant--that it may or may not specify.
436These attributes can be merged from various faces, and then together
437specify a font.
438
439Faces are supported on terminals that can display color or fonts.
440These terminal capabilities are auto-detected. Details can be found
441under Lisp changes, below.
442
443** New default font is Courier 12pt.
444
424d8b44
DL
445+++
446** When using a windowing terminal, each Emacs window now has a cursor
447of its own. When the window is selected, the cursor is solid;
448otherwise, it is hollow.
a933dad1
DL
449
450** Bitmap areas to the left and right of windows are used to display
451truncation marks, continuation marks, overlay arrows and alike. The
452foreground, background, and stipple of these areas can be changed by
453customizing face `fringe'.
454
455** The mode line under X is now drawn with shadows by default. You
456can change its appearance by modifying the face `modeline'.
457
458** LessTif support.
459
424d8b44
DL
460Emacs now runs with the LessTif toolkit (see <http://www.lesstif.org>).
461You will need a version 0.88.1 or later.
a933dad1
DL
462
463** Toolkit scroll bars.
464
465Emacs now uses toolkit scrollbars if available. When configured for
466LessTif/Motif, it will use that toolkit's scrollbar. Otherwise, when
467configured for Lucid and Athena widgets, it will use the Xaw3d scroll
468bar if Xaw3d is available. You can turn off the use of toolkit scroll
469bars by specifying `--with-toolkit-scroll-bars=no' when configuring
470Emacs.
471
472When you encounter problems with the Xaw3d scroll bar, watch out how
473Xaw3d is compiled on your system. If the Makefile generated from
474Xaw3d's Imakefile contains a `-DNARROWPROTO' compiler option, and your
475Emacs system configuration file `s/your-system.h' does not contain a
476define for NARROWPROTO, you might consider adding it. Take
477`s/freebsd.h' as an example.
478
479Alternatively, if you don't have access to the Xaw3d source code, take
480a look at your system's imake configuration file, for example in the
481directory `/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/config' (paths are different on
482different systems). You will find files `*.cf' there. If your
483system's cf-file contains a line like `#define NeedWidePrototypes NO',
484add a `#define NARROWPROTO' to your Emacs system configuration file.
485
486The reason for this is that one Xaw3d function uses `double' or
487`float' function parameters depending on the setting of NARROWPROTO.
488This is not a problem when Imakefiles are used because each system's
489image configuration file contains the necessary information. Since
490Emacs doesn't use imake, this has do be done manually.
491
492** Toggle buttons and radio buttons in menus.
493
494When compiled with LessTif (or Motif) support, Emacs uses toolkit
495widgets for radio and toggle buttons in menus. When configured for
496Lucid, Emacs draws radio buttons and toggle buttons similar to Motif.
497
424d8b44 498+++
a933dad1
DL
499** Highlighting of trailing whitespace.
500
501When `show-trailing-whitespace' is non-nil, Emacs displays trailing
502whitespace in the face `trailing-whitespace'. Trailing whitespace is
503defined as spaces or tabs at the end of a line. To avoid busy
504highlighting when entering new text, trailing whitespace is not
505displayed if point is at the end of the line containing the
506whitespace.
507
6e612d4d 508+++
a933dad1
DL
509** Busy-cursor.
510
511Emacs can optionally display a busy-cursor under X. You can turn the
512display on or off by customizing group `cursor'.
513
424d8b44 514+++
a933dad1
DL
515** Blinking cursor
516
517M-x blink-cursor-mode toggles a blinking cursor under X and on
518terminals having terminal capabilities `vi', `vs', and `ve'. Blinking
519and related parameters like frequency and delay can be customized in
520the group `cursor'.
521
522** New font-lock support mode `jit-lock-mode'.
523
524This support mode is roughly equivalent to `lazy-lock' but is
525generally faster. It supports stealth and deferred fontification.
526See the documentation of the function `jit-lock-mode' for more
527details.
528
529Font-lock uses jit-lock-mode as default support mode, so you don't
530have to do anything to activate it.
531
532** Tabs and variable-width text.
533
534Tabs are now displayed with stretch properties; the width of a tab is
535defined as a multiple of the normal character width of a frame, and is
536independent of the fonts used in the text where the tab appears.
537Thus, tabs can be used to line up text in different fonts.
538
539** Enhancements of the Lucid menu bar
540
424d8b44 541+++
a933dad1
DL
542*** The Lucid menu bar now supports the resource "margin".
543
544 emacs.pane.menubar.margin: 5
545
79dd1637
RS
546The default margin is 4 which makes the menu bar appear like the
547LessTif/Motif one.
a933dad1 548
79dd1637
RS
549*** Arrows that indicate sub-menus are now drawn with shadows, as in
550LessTif and Motif.
a933dad1 551
34d90e29 552+++
a933dad1
DL
553** Hscrolling in C code.
554
cc181e95
GM
555Horizontal scrolling now happens automatically if
556`automatic-hscrolling' is set (the default). This setting can be
557customized.
a933dad1
DL
558
559** Tool bar support.
560
561Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. For details
562how to define a tool bar, see the page describing Lisp-level changes.
d1e68bce
DL
563Tool-bar global minor mode controls whether or not it is displayed.
564To make the tool bar more useful, we need contributions of extra icons
565for specific modes (with copyright assignments).
a933dad1 566
424d8b44 567+++
a933dad1
DL
568** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
569
570Different parts of the mode line under X have been made
571mouse-sensitive. Moving the mouse to a mouse-sensitive part in the mode
572line changes the appearance of the mouse pointer to an arrow, and help
573about available mouse actions is displayed either in the echo area, or
574in the tooltip window if you have enabled one.
575
576Currently, the following actions have been defined:
577
578- Mouse-1 on the buffer name in the mode line switches between two
579buffers.
580
581- Mouse-2 on the buffer-name switches to the next buffer, and
582M-mouse-2 switches to the previous buffer in the buffer list.
583
584- Mouse-3 on the buffer-name displays a buffer menu.
585
424d8b44
DL
586- Mouse-2 on the read-only or modified status in the mode line (`%' or
587`*') toggles the status.
a933dad1
DL
588
589- Mouse-3 on the mode name display a minor-mode menu.
590
591** LessTif/Motif file selection dialog.
592
593When Emacs is configured to use LessTif or Motif, reading a file name
e33b0397 594from a menu will pop up a file selection dialog if `use-dialog-box' is
a933dad1
DL
595non-nil.
596
597** Emacs can display faces on TTY frames.
598
599Emacs automatically detects terminals that are able to display colors.
600Faces with a weight greater than normal are displayed extra-bright, if
601the terminal supports it. Faces with a weight less than normal and
602italic faces are displayed dimmed, if the terminal supports it.
603Underlined faces are displayed underlined if possible. Other face
163ea954
RS
604attributes such as `overline', `strike-through', and `box' are ignored
605on terminals.
a933dad1
DL
606
607** Sound support
608
2f516940 609Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and FreeBSD (Voxware
0b50c67f 610driver and native BSD driver, a.k.a. Luigi's driver). Currently
2f516940 611supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio (*.au).
a933dad1 612
424d8b44 613+++
a933dad1
DL
614** A new variable, backup-by-copying-when-privileged-mismatch, gives
615the highest file uid for which backup-by-copying-when-mismatch will be
616forced on. The assumption is that uids less than or equal to this
617value are special uids (root, bin, daemon, etc.--not real system
618users) and that files owned by these users should not change ownership,
619even if your system policy allows users other than root to edit them.
620
621The default is 200; set the variable to nil to disable the feature.
622
0e18b431 623+++
a933dad1
DL
624** A block cursor can be drawn as wide as the glyph under it under X.
625
626As an example: if a block cursor is over a tab character, it will be
627drawn as wide as that tab on the display. To do this, set
628`x-stretch-cursor' to a non-nil value.
629
fdd8bb68 630+++
a933dad1
DL
631** Empty display lines at the end of a buffer may be marked with a
632bitmap (this is similar to the tilde displayed by vi).
633
634This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable
635`indicate-empty-lines' to a non-nil value. The default value of this
636variable is found in `default-indicate-empty-lines'.
637
c5d00c64 638+++
a933dad1
DL
639** There is a new "aggressive" scrolling method.
640
641When scrolling up because point is above the window start, if the
642value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-up-aggessively' is a
643number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
d5951185 644fraction of the window's height from the top of the window.
a933dad1
DL
645
646When scrolling down because point is below the window end, if the
647value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-down-aggessively' is a
648number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
d5951185 649fraction of the window's height from the bottom of the window.
a933dad1
DL
650
651** The rectangle commands now avoid inserting undesirable spaces,
652notably at the end of lines.
653
654All these functions have been rewritten to avoid inserting unwanted
655spaces, and an optional prefix now allows them to behave the old way.
656
424d8b44 657+++
eee54b0e
DL
658There is a new command M-x replace-rectangle.
659
a933dad1
DL
660** The new command M-x query-replace-regexp-eval acts like
661query-replace-regexp, but takes a Lisp expression which is evaluated
662after each match to get the replacement text.
663
00782214 664+++
d5483ab1
GM
665** M-x query-replace recognizes a new command `e' (or `E') that lets
666you edit the replacement string.
4ff40dd0 667
424d8b44 668** The new command mail-abbrev-complete-alias, bound to `M-TAB', lets
4ff40dd0
GM
669you complete mail aliases in the text, analogous to
670lisp-complete-symbol.
671
7af69644 672+++
a933dad1
DL
673** Emacs now resizes mini-windows if appropriate.
674
163ea954
RS
675If a message is longer than one line, or minibuffer contents are
676longer than one line, Emacs now resizes the minibuffer window unless
677it is on a frame of its own. You can control the maximum minibuffer
678window size by setting the following variable:
a933dad1
DL
679
680- User option: max-mini-window-height
681
682Maximum height for resizing mini-windows. If a float, it specifies a
683fraction of the mini-window frame's height. If an integer, it
684specifies a number of lines. If nil, don't resize.
685
686Default is 0.25.
687
2f72fd2f
GM
688** The command `Info-search' now uses a search history.
689
0d43b60d
GM
690** Changes to hideshow.el
691
692Hideshow is now at version 5.x. It uses a new algorithms for block
693selection and traversal and includes more isearch support.
694
695*** Generalized block selection and traversal
696
697A block is now recognized by three things: its start and end regexps
698(both strings), and a match-data selector (an integer) specifying
699which sub-expression in the start regexp serves as the place where a
700`forward-sexp'-like function can operate. Hideshow always adjusts
701point to this sub-expression before calling `hs-forward-sexp-func'
702(which for most modes evaluates to `forward-sexp').
703
704If the match-data selector is not specified, it defaults to zero,
705i.e., the entire start regexp is valid, w/ no prefix. This is
706backwards compatible with previous versions of hideshow. Please see
707the docstring for variable `hs-special-modes-alist' for details.
708
709*** Isearch support for updating mode line
710
711During incremental search, if Hideshow minor mode is active, hidden
712blocks are temporarily shown. The variable `hs-headline' records the
713line at the beginning of the opened block (preceding the hidden
714portion of the buffer), and the mode line is refreshed. When a block
715is re-hidden, the variable is set to nil.
716
717To show `hs-headline' in the mode line, you may wish to include
718something like this in your .emacs.
719
720 (add-hook 'hs-minor-mode-hook
721 (lambda ()
722 (add-to-list 'mode-line-format 'hs-headline)))
723
559cee90
DL
724** Changes to Change Log mode and Add-Log functions
725
424d8b44 726+++
559cee90
DL
727If you invoke `add-change-log-entry' from a backup file, it makes an
728entry appropriate for the file's parent. This is useful for making
729log entries by comparing a version with deleted functions.
730
424d8b44 731+++
559cee90 732New command M-x change-log-merge merges another log into the current
424d8b44
DL
733buffer.
734
735+++
736New command M-x change-log-redate fixes any old-style date entries in
737a log file.
eb2aac9d 738
502004be 739+++
eb2aac9d
GM
740Change Log mode now adds a file's version number to change log entries
741if user-option `change-log-version-info-enabled' is non-nil.
742
502004be 743+++
424d8b44
DL
744Unless the file is under version control the search for a file's
745version number is performed based on regular expressions from
746`change-log-version-number-regexp-list' which can be cutomized.
747Version numbers are only found in the first 10 percent of a file.
eb2aac9d 748
3476b54a
GM
749** Changes in Font Lock
750
751*** The new function `font-lock-remove-keywords' can be used to remove
752font-lock keywords from the current buffer or from a specific major
753mode.
754
b3b98592
GM
755** Comint (subshell) changes
756
66b6c480
MB
757By default, comint no longer uses the variable `comint-prompt-regexp' to
758distiguish prompts from user-input. Instead, it notices which parts of
759the text were output by the process, and which entered by the user, and
760attaches `field' properties to allow emacs commands to use this information.
761Common movement commands, notably beginning-of-line, respect field
762boundaries in a fairly natural manner.
763To disable this feature, and use the old behavior, set the variable
764`comint-use-prompt-regexp-instead-of-fields' to a non-nil value.
765
b3b98592
GM
766Comint now includes new features to send commands to running processes
767and redirect the output to a designated buffer or buffers.
768
769The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command reads a command and
770buffer name from the mini-buffer. The command is sent to the current
771buffer's process, and its output is inserted into the specified buffer.
772
773The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command-to-process acts like
774M-x comint-redirect-send-command but additionally reads the name of
775the buffer whose process should be used from the mini-buffer.
776
8c1bec7c
MB
777Packages based on comint.el like shell-mode, and scheme-interaction-mode
778now highlight user input and program prompts, and support choosing
779previous input with mouse-2. To control these feature, see the
780user-options `comint-highlight-input' and `comint-highlight-prompt'.
31fc5d15 781
e26cec67
GM
782** Changes to Rmail mode
783
c0510d27
GM
784*** The new user-option rmail-rmail-user-mail-address-regexp can be
785set to fine tune the identification of of the correspondent when
786receiving new mail. If it matches the address of the sender, the
787recipient is taken as correspondent of a mail. If nil, the default,
788`user-login-name' and `user-mail-address' are used to exclude yourself
789as correspondent.
790
791Usually you don't have to set this variable, except if you collect
792mails sent by you under different user names. Then it should be a
993d8b7d 793regexp matching your mail addresses.
c0510d27 794
3b55acc9
GM
795*** The new user-option rmail-confirm-expunge controls whether and how
796to ask for confirmation before expunging deleted messages from an
797Rmail file. You can choose between no confirmation, confirmation
798with y-or-n-p, or confirmation with yes-or-no-p. Default is to ask
799for confirmation with yes-or-no-p.
800
6a1950ec
GM
801*** RET is now bound in the Rmail summary to rmail-summary-goto-msg,
802like `j'.
803
5bb6f079
RS
804*** There is a new user option `rmail-digest-end-regexps' that
805specifies the regular expressions to detect the line that ends a
2d5e9b54 806digest message.
e26cec67 807
993d8b7d
DL
808*** The new user option `rmail-automatic-folder-directives' specifies
809in which folder to put messages automatically.
810
400a1ed0
GM
811** Changes to TeX mode
812
813The default mode has been changed from `plain-tex-mode' to
814`latex-mode'.
815
a933dad1
DL
816** Changes to RefTeX mode
817
818*** RefTeX has new support for index generation. Index entries can be
819 created with `C-c <', with completion available on index keys.
820 Pressing `C-c /' indexes the word at the cursor with a default
821 macro. `C-c >' compiles all index entries into an alphabetically
822 sorted *Index* buffer which looks like the final index. Entries
823 can be edited from that buffer.
824
825*** Label and citation key selection now allow to select several
826 items and reference them together (use `m' to mark items, `a' or
827 `A' to use all marked entries).
828
829*** reftex.el has been split into a number of smaller files to reduce
830 memory use when only a part of RefTeX is being used.
831
832*** a new command `reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex' (bound to `C-c &'
833 in BibTeX-mode) can be called in a BibTeX database buffer in order
834 to show locations in LaTeX documents where a particular entry has
835 been cited.
836
38de9631
GM
837** Emacs Lisp mode now allows multiple levels of outline headings.
838The level of a heading is determined from the number of leading
839semicolons in a heading line. Toplevel forms starting with a `('
840in column 1 are always made leaves.
841
a933dad1
DL
842** The M-x time-stamp command (most commonly used on write-file-hooks)
843has the following new features:
844
845*** The patterns for finding the time stamp and for updating a pattern
846may match text spanning multiple lines. For example, some people like
847to have the filename and date on separate lines. The new variable
848time-stamp-inserts-lines controls the matching for multi-line patterns.
849
850*** More than one time stamp can be updated in the same file. This
851feature is useful if you need separate time stamps in a program source
852file to both include in formatted documentation and insert in the
853compiled binary. The same time-stamp will be written at each matching
854pattern. The variable time-stamp-count enables this new feature; it
855defaults to 1.
856
5d94f558 857** Partial Completion mode now completes environment variables in
b675095c
GM
858file names.
859
424d8b44 860+++
a933dad1
DL
861** Tooltips.
862
863Tooltips are small X windows displaying a help string at the current
864mouse position. To use them, use the Lisp package `tooltip' which you
865can access via the user option `tooltip-mode'.
866
867Tooltips also provides support for GUD debugging. If activated,
868variable values can be displayed in tooltips by pointing at them with
869the mouse in source buffers. You can customize various aspects of the
870tooltip display in the group `tooltip'.
871
424d8b44 872+++
a933dad1
DL
873** Customize changes
874
875*** Customize now supports comments about customized items. Use the
34f94cf9
DL
876`State' menu to add comments. Note that customization comments will
877cause the customizations to fail in earlier versions of Emacs.
a933dad1
DL
878
879*** The new option `custom-buffer-done-function' says whether to kill
880Custom buffers when you've done with them or just bury them (the
881default).
882
0ae51efb
GM
883*** The keyword :set-after in defcustom allows to specify dependencies
884between custom options. Example:
885
886 (defcustom default-input-method nil
887 "*Default input method for multilingual text (a string).
888 This is the input method activated automatically by the command
889 `toggle-input-method' (\\[toggle-input-method])."
890 :group 'mule
891 :type '(choice (const nil) string)
892 :set-after '(current-language-environment))
893
894This specifies that default-input-method should be set after
895current-language-environment even if default-input-method appears
896first in a custom-set-variables statement.
897
a933dad1
DL
898** New features in evaluation commands
899
5e03eb84 900*** The commands to evaluate Lisp expressions, such as C-M-x in Lisp
a933dad1
DL
901modes, C-j in Lisp Interaction mode, and M-:, now bind the variables
902print-level, print-length, and debug-on-error based on the
903customizable variables eval-expression-print-level,
904eval-expression-print-length, and eval-expression-debug-on-error.
905
5e03eb84
GM
906*** The function `eval-defun' (M-C-x) now loads Edebug and instruments
907code when called with a prefix argument.
908
ead53494
GM
909** Ispell changes
910
37d8a691 911+++
bbe15990
EZ
912*** The command `ispell' now spell-checks a region if
913transient-mark-mode is on, and the mark is active. Otherwise it
ead53494
GM
914spell-checks the current buffer.
915
37d8a691 916+++
385ff9e3
GM
917*** Support for synchronous subprocesses - DOS/Windoze - has been
918added.
919
920*** An "alignment error" bug was fixed when a manual spelling
921correction is made and re-checked.
922
74ec6045 923*** An Italian and a Portuguese dictionary definition has been added.
385ff9e3
GM
924
925*** Region skipping performance has been vastly improved in some
926cases.
927
928*** Spell checking HTML buffers has been improved and isn't so strict
929on syntax errors.
930
931*** The buffer-local words are now always placed on a new line at the
932end of the buffer.
933
a933dad1
DL
934** Dired changes
935
936*** New variable `dired-recursive-deletes' determines if the delete
937command will delete non-empty directories recursively. The default
938is, delete only empty directories.
939
940*** New variable `dired-recursive-copies' determines if the copy
941command will copy directories recursively. The default is, do not
942copy directories recursively.
943
f6737cde
GM
944*** In command `dired-do-shell-command' (usually bound to `!') a `?'
945in the shell command has a special meaning similar to `*', but with
946the difference that the command will be run on each file individually.
947
2f72fd2f
GM
948*** The new command `dired-find-alternate-file' (usually bound to `a')
949replaces the Dired buffer with the buffer for an alternate file or
950directory.
951
7381ae05
MB
952*** The new command `dired-show-file-type' (usually bound to `w') shows
953a message in the echo area describing what type of file the point is on.
954This command invokes the external program `file' do its work, and so
955will only work on systems with that program, and will be only as
956accurate or inaccurate as it is.
957
e024b101
GM
958*** Dired now properly handles undo changes of adding/removing `-R'
959from ls switches.
960
a933dad1
DL
961** The variable mail-specify-envelope-from controls whether to
962use the -f option when sending mail.
963
b1c609b1
GM
964** CC mode changes.
965
966Note: This release contains changes that might not be compatible with
967current user setups (although it's believed that these
968incompatibilities will only show in very uncommon circumstances).
969However, since the impact is uncertain, these changes may be rolled
970back depending on user feedback. Therefore there's no forward
971compatibility guarantee wrt the new features introduced in this
972release.
973
7972fcfc
GM
974*** c-style-variables-are-local-p now defaults to t.
975This is an incompatible change that has been made to make the behavior
976of the style system wrt global variable settings less confusing for
977non-advanced users. If you know what this variable does you might
978want to set it to nil in your .emacs, otherwise you probably don't
979have to bother.
980
981Defaulting c-style-variables-are-local-p to t avoids the confusing
982situation that occurs when a user sets some style variables globally
487522fe 983and edits both a Java and a non-Java file in the same Emacs session.
7972fcfc
GM
984If the style variables aren't buffer local in this case, loading of
985the second file will cause the default style (either "gnu" or "java"
986by default) to override the global settings made by the user.
987
b1c609b1
GM
988*** New initialization procedure for the style system.
989When the initial style for a buffer is determined by CC Mode (from the
990variable c-default-style), the global values of style variables now
991take precedence over the values specified by the chosen style. This
992is different than the old behavior: previously, the style-specific
993settings would override the global settings. This change makes it
994possible to do simple configuration in the intuitive way with
995Customize or with setq lines in one's .emacs file.
996
997By default, the global value of every style variable is the new
998special symbol set-from-style, which causes the value to be taken from
999the style system. This means that in effect, only an explicit setting
1000of a style variable will cause the "overriding" behavior described
1001above.
1002
1003Also note that global settings override style-specific settings *only*
1004when the initial style of a buffer is chosen by a CC Mode major mode
1005function. When a style is chosen in other ways --- for example, by a
1006call like (c-set-style "gnu") in a hook, or via M-x c-set-style ---
1007then the style-specific values take precedence over any global style
1008values. In Lisp terms, global values override style-specific values
1009only when the new second argument to c-set-style is non-nil; see the
1010function documentation for more info.
1011
1012The purpose of these changes is to make it easier for users,
1013especially novice users, to do simple customizations with Customize or
1014with setq in their .emacs files. On the other hand, the new system is
1015intended to be compatible with advanced users' customizations as well,
1016such as those that choose styles in hooks or whatnot. This new system
1017is believed to be almost entirely compatible with current
1018configurations, in spite of the changed precedence between style and
1019global variable settings when a buffer's default style is set.
1020
1021(Thanks to Eric Eide for clarifying this explanation a bit.)
1022
1023**** c-offsets-alist is now a customizable variable.
1024This became possible as a result of the new initialization behavior.
1025
1026This variable is treated slightly differently from the other style
1027variables; instead of using the symbol set-from-style, it will be
1028completed with the syntactic symbols it doesn't already contain when
1029the style is first initialized. This means it now defaults to the
1030empty list to make all syntactic elements get their values from the
1031style system.
1032
1033**** Compatibility variable to restore the old behavior.
1034In case your configuration doesn't work with this change, you can set
1035c-old-style-variable-behavior to non-nil to get the old behavior back
1036as far as possible.
1037
1038*** Improvements to line breaking and text filling.
1039CC Mode now handles this more intelligently and seamlessly wrt the
1040surrounding code, especially inside comments. For details see the new
1041chapter about this in the manual.
1042
1043**** New variable to recognize comment line prefix decorations.
1044The variable c-comment-prefix-regexp has been added to properly
1045recognize the line prefix in both block and line comments. It's
1046primarily used to initialize the various paragraph recognition and
1047adaptive filling variables that the text handling functions uses.
1048
1049**** New variable c-block-comment-prefix.
1050This is a generalization of the now obsolete variable
1051c-comment-continuation-stars to handle arbitrary strings.
1052
1053**** CC Mode now uses adaptive fill mode.
1054This to make it adapt better to the paragraph style inside comments.
1055
1056It's also possible to use other adaptive filling packages inside CC
1057Mode, notably Kyle E. Jones' Filladapt mode (http://wonderworks.com/).
1058A new convenience function c-setup-filladapt sets up Filladapt for use
1059inside CC Mode.
1060
1061Note though that the 2.12 version of Filladapt lacks a feature that
1062causes it to work suboptimally when c-comment-prefix-regexp can match
1063the empty string (which it commonly does). A patch for that is
1064available from the CC Mode web site (http://www.python.org/emacs/
1065cc-mode/).
1066
1067**** It's now possible to selectively turn off auto filling.
1068The variable c-ignore-auto-fill is used to ignore auto fill mode in
1069specific contexts, e.g. in preprocessor directives and in string
1070literals.
1071
1072**** New context sensitive line break function c-context-line-break.
1073It works like newline-and-indent in normal code, and adapts the line
1074prefix according to the comment style when used inside comments. If
1075you're normally using newline-and-indent, you might want to switch to
1076this function.
1077
1078*** Fixes to IDL mode.
1079It now does a better job in recognizing only the constructs relevant
1080to IDL. E.g. it no longer matches "class" as the beginning of a
1081struct block, but it does match the CORBA 2.3 "valuetype" keyword.
1082Thanks to Eric Eide.
1083
1084*** Improvements to the Whitesmith style.
1085It now keeps the style consistently on all levels and both when
1086opening braces hangs and when they don't.
1087
1088**** New lineup function c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block.
1089
1090*** New lineup functions c-lineup-template-args and c-indent-multi-line-block.
1091See their docstrings for details. c-lineup-template-args does a
1092better job of tracking the brackets used as parens in C++ templates,
1093and is used by default to line up continued template arguments.
1094
1095*** c-lineup-comment now preserves alignment with a comment on the
1096previous line. It used to instead preserve comments that started in
1097the column specified by comment-column.
1098
1099*** c-lineup-C-comments handles "free form" text comments.
1100In comments with a long delimiter line at the start, the indentation
1101is kept unchanged for lines that start with an empty comment line
1102prefix. This is intended for the type of large block comments that
1103contain documentation with its own formatting. In these you normally
1104don't want CC Mode to change the indentation.
1105
1106*** The `c' syntactic symbol is now relative to the comment start
1107instead of the previous line, to make integers usable as lineup
1108arguments.
1109
1110*** All lineup functions have gotten docstrings.
1111
1112*** More preprocessor directive movement functions.
1113c-down-conditional does the reverse of c-up-conditional.
1114c-up-conditional-with-else and c-down-conditional-with-else are
1115variants of these that also stops at "#else" lines (suggested by Don
1116Provan).
1117
1118*** Minor improvements to many movement functions in tricky situations.
1119
c407c570
GM
1120** Makefile mode changes
1121
1122*** The mode now uses the abbrev table `makefile-mode-abbrev-table'.
1123
5d94f558 1124*** Conditionals and include statements are now highlighted when
c407c570
GM
1125Fontlock mode is active.
1126
87be76f6
GM
1127** Isearch changes
1128
3353ef5a
GM
1129*** Isearch now puts a call to `isearch-resume' in the command history,
1130so that searches can be resumed.
1131
1132*** In Isearch mode, M-C-s and M-C-r are now bound like C-s and C-r,
c407c570
GM
1133respectively, i.e. you can repeat a regexp isearch with the same keys
1134that started the search.
1135
87be76f6 1136*** In Isearch mode, mouse-2 in the echo area now yanks the current
a933dad1
DL
1137selection into the search string rather than giving an error.
1138
c8a8458a 1139+++
87be76f6
GM
1140*** There is a new lazy highlighting feature in incremental search.
1141
d35fce81 1142Lazy highlighting is switched on/off by customizing variable
87be76f6
GM
1143`isearch-lazy-highlight'. When active, all matches for the current
1144search string are highlighted. The current match is highlighted as
1145before using face `isearch' or `region'. All other matches are
1146highlighted using face `isearch-lazy-highlight-face' which defaults to
5d94f558 1147`secondary-selection'.
87be76f6
GM
1148
1149The extra highlighting makes it easier to anticipate where the cursor
1150will end up each time you press C-s or C-r to repeat a pending search.
1151Highlighting of these additional matches happens in a deferred fashion
1152using "idle timers," so the cycles needed do not rob isearch of its
1153usual snappy response.
1154
1155If `isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup' is set to t, highlights for
1156matches are automatically cleared when you end the search. If it is
1157set to nil, you can remove the highlights manually with `M-x
1158isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup'.
1159
21bc6203 1160+++
35384f06
GM
1161** Changes in sort.el
1162
1163The function sort-numeric-fields interprets numbers starting with `0'
12c25bdc 1164as octal and numbers starting with `0x' or `0X' as hexadecimal. The
21bc6203 1165new user-option sort-numeric-base can be used to specify a default
35384f06 1166numeric base.
87be76f6 1167
d7b511c4
GM
1168** Changes to Ange-ftp
1169
424d8b44 1170+++
d7b511c4 1171*** Ange-ftp allows you to specify of a port number in remote file
d67f47e4
DL
1172names cleanly. It is appended to the host name, separated by a hash
1173sign, e.g. `/foo@bar.org#666:mumble'. (This syntax comes from EFS.)
1174
d7b511c4
GM
1175*** If the new user-option `ange-ftp-try-passive-mode' is set, passive
1176ftp mode will be used if the ftp client supports that.
1177
9d453139
SS
1178*** Ange-ftp handles the output of the w32-style clients which
1179output ^M at the end of lines.
1180
4b9347b3
GM
1181** Shell script mode changes.
1182
1183Shell script mode (sh-script) can now indent scripts for shells
1184derived from sh and rc. The indentation style is customizeable, and
1185sh-script can attempt to "learn" the current buffer's style.
1186
79214ddf
FP
1187** Etags changes.
1188
1189*** In DOS, etags looks for file.cgz if it cannot find file.c.
1190
aca0be23 1191*** New option --ignore-case-regex is an alternative to --regex. It is now
8dc78b52
FP
1192possible to bind a regexp to a language, by prepending the regexp with
1193{lang}, where lang is one of the languages that `etags --help' prints out.
1194This feature is useful especially for regex files, where each line contains
1195a regular expression. The manual contains details.
aca0be23 1196
79214ddf
FP
1197*** In C and derived languages, etags creates tags for function
1198declarations when given the --declarations option.
1199
1200*** In C++, tags are created for "operator". The tags have the form
aca0be23 1201"operator+", without spaces between the keyword and the operator.
79214ddf
FP
1202
1203*** New language Ada: tags are functions, procedures, packages, tasks, and
1204types.
1205
de370c4c 1206*** In Fortran, `procedure' is not tagged.
79214ddf
FP
1207
1208*** In Java, tags are created for "interface".
1209
1210*** In Lisp, "(defstruct (foo", "(defun (operator" and similar constructs
1211are now tagged.
1212
1213*** In Perl, the --globals option tags global variables. my and local
1214variables are tagged.
1215
1216*** New language Python: def and class at the beginning of a line are tags.
1217
8dc78b52
FP
1218*** .ss files are Scheme files, .pdb is Postscript with C syntax, .psw is
1219for PSWrap.
79214ddf 1220
c8d94f86 1221+++
f6737cde
GM
1222** Changes in etags.el
1223
3f6e4b8b
GM
1224*** The new user-option tags-case-fold-search can be used to make
1225tags operations case-sensitive or case-insensitive. The default
1226is to use the same setting as case-fold-search.
1227
f6737cde
GM
1228*** You can display additional output with M-x tags-apropos by setting
1229the new variable tags-apropos-additional-actions.
1230
1231If non-nil, the variable's value should be a list of triples (TITLE
1232FUNCTION TO-SEARCH). For each triple, M-x tags-apropos processes
1233TO-SEARCH and lists tags from it. TO-SEARCH should be an alist,
1234obarray, or symbol. If it is a symbol, the symbol's value is used.
1235
1236TITLE is a string to use to label the list of tags from TO-SEARCH.
1237
1238FUNCTION is a function to call when an entry is selected in the Tags
1239List buffer. It is called with one argument, the selected symbol.
1240
1241A useful example value for this variable might be something like:
1242
1243 '(("Emacs Lisp" Info-goto-emacs-command-node obarray)
1244 ("Common Lisp" common-lisp-hyperspec common-lisp-hyperspec-obarray)
1245 ("SCWM" scwm-documentation scwm-obarray))
1246
1247*** The face tags-tag-face can be used to customize the appearance
1248of tags in the output of M-x tags-apropos.
1249
1250*** Setting tags-apropos-verbose to a non-nil value displays the
1251names of tags files in the *Tags List* buffer.
1252
424d8b44 1253+++
fbc164de
PE
1254** Emacs now attempts to determine the initial language environment
1255and preferred and locale coding systems systematically from the
1256LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG environment variables during startup.
1257
c3eb1f10 1258+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
1259** New language environments `Polish', `Latin-8' and `Latin-9'.
1260Latin-8 and Latin-9 correspond respectively to the ISO character sets
12618859-14 (Celtic) and 8859-15 (updated Latin-1, with the Euro sign).
f6499c03
DL
1262GNU Intlfonts doesn't support these yet; there are basic 8859-14 and
12638859-15 fonts at <URL:http://czyborra.com/charsets/> and recent X
1264releases have 8859-15. There are new Latin-8 and Latin-9 prefix
1265(only) and Polish slash input methods in Leim.
59c1bf85 1266
424d8b44 1267+++
163ea954 1268** Fortran mode has a new command `fortran-strip-sequence-nos' to
e33b0397
DL
1269remove text past column 72. The syntax class of `\' in Fortran is now
1270appropriate for C-style escape sequences in strings.
1271
1272** SGML mode's default `sgml-validate-command' is now `nsgmls'.
1273
424d8b44 1274+++
6f8ea2ae
DL
1275** A new command `view-emacs-problems' (C-h P) displays the PROBLEMS file.
1276
6ab8d72d 1277+++
f6499c03 1278** The Dabbrev package has a new user-option `dabbrev-ignored-regexps'
c0510d27
GM
1279containing a list of regular expressions. Buffers matching a regular
1280expression from that list, are not checked.
1281
5d94f558
SS
1282** Emacs can now figure out modification times of remote files.
1283When you do C-x C-f /user@host:/path/file RET and edit the file,
1284and someone else modifies the file, you will be prompted to revert
1285the buffer, just like for the local files.
1286
dc28878c
GM
1287** The buffer menu (C-x C-b) no longer lists the *Buffer List* buffer.
1288
df8a9f78 1289+++
95931eb1
GM
1290** When invoked with a prefix argument, the command `list-abbrevs' now
1291displays local abbrevs, only.
1292
54baed30
GM
1293** VC Changes
1294
1295VC has been overhauled internally. It is now modular, making it
1296easier to plug-in arbitrary version control backends. (See Lisp
1297Changes for details on the new structure.) As a result, the mechanism
1298to enable and disable support for particular version systems has
1299changed: everything is now controlled by the new variable
1300`vc-handled-backends'. Its value is a list of atoms that identify
1301version systems; the default is '(RCS CVS SCCS). When finding a file,
1302each of the backends in that list is tried in order to see whether the
1303file is registered in that backend.
1304
1305When registering a new file, VC first tries each of the listed
1306backends to see if any of them considers itself "responsible" for the
1307directory of the file (e.g. because a corresponding subdirectory for
1308master files exists). If none of the backends is responsible, then
1309the first backend in the list that could register the file is chosen.
1310As a consequence, the variable `vc-default-back-end' is now obsolete.
1311
1312The old variable `vc-master-templates' is also obsolete, although VC
1313still supports it for backward compatibility. To define templates for
1314RCS or SCCS, you should rather use the new variables
1315vc-{rcs,sccs}-master-templates. (There is no such feature under CVS
1316where it doesn't make sense.)
1317
1318The variables `vc-ignore-vc-files' and `vc-handle-cvs' are also
1319obsolete now, you must set `vc-handled-backends' to nil or exclude
1320`CVS' from the list, respectively, to achieve their effect now.
1321
1322*** General Changes
1323
1324The variable `vc-checkout-carefully' is obsolete: the corresponding
1325checks are always done now.
1326
1327VC Dired buffers are now kept up-to-date during all version control
1328operations.
1329
1330*** Changes for CVS
1331
1332There is a new user option, `vc-cvs-stay-local'. If it is `t' (the
1333default), then VC avoids network queries for files registered in
1334remote repositories. The state of such files is then only determined
1335by heuristics and past information. `vc-cvs-stay-local' can also be a
1336regexp to match against repository hostnames; only files from hosts
1337that match it are treated locally. If the variable is nil, then VC
1338queries the repository just as often as it does for local files.
1339
1340If `vc-cvs-stay-local' is on, and there have been changes in the
1341repository, VC notifies you about it when you actually try to commit.
1342If you want to check for updates from the repository without trying to
1343commit, you can either use C-u C-x v m to perform an update on the
1344current file, or you can use C-x v r RET to get an update for an
1345entire directory tree.
1346
1347The new user option `vc-cvs-use-edit' indicates whether VC should call
1348"cvs edit" to make files writeable; it defaults to `t'. (This option
1349is only meaningful if the CVSREAD variable is set, or if files are
1350"watched" by other developers.)
1351
1352*** Lisp Changes in VC
1353
1354VC has been restructured internally to make it modular. You can now
1355add support for arbitrary version control backends by writing a
1356library that provides a certain set of backend-specific functions, and
1357then telling VC to use that library. For example, to add support for
1358a version system named FOO, you write a library named vc-foo.el, which
1359provides a number of functions vc-foo-... (see commentary at the end
1360of vc.el for a detailed list of them). To make VC use that library,
1361you need to put it somewhere into Emacs' load path and add the atom
1362`FOO' to the list `vc-handled-backends'.
1363
a933dad1
DL
1364** New modes and packages
1365
ff332647 1366+++
90cbf47e
GM
1367*** The new package timeclock.el is a mode is for keeping track of time
1368intervals. You can use it for whatever purpose you like, but the
1369typical scenario is to keep track of how much time you spend working
1370on certain projects.
1371
894ca69e 1372+++
90cbf47e 1373*** The new package hi-lock.el, text matching interactively entered
d96d6bb0 1374regexp's can be highlighted. For example,
abb2db1c 1375
d96d6bb0 1376 M-x highlight-regexp RET clearly RET RET
abb2db1c
GM
1377
1378will highlight all occurrences of `clearly' using a yellow background
1379face. New occurrences of `clearly' will be highlighted as they are
1380typed. `M-x unhighlight-regexp RET' will remove the highlighting.
1381Any existing face can be used for highlighting and a set of
1382appropriate faces is provided. The regexps can be written into the
1383current buffer in a form that will be recognized the next time the
1384corresponding file is read.
1385
424d8b44 1386+++
d96d6bb0 1387*** The new package zone.el plays games with Emacs' display when
abb2db1c
GM
1388Emacs is idle.
1389
31fc5d15
GM
1390*** The new package xml.el provides a simple but generic XML
1391parser. It doesn't parse the DTDs however.
1392
5cb6a58e
SM
1393*** The comment operations are now provided by the newcomment.el
1394package which allows different styles of comment-region and should
1395be more robust while offering the same functionality.
1396
424d8b44 1397+++
578979ee
GM
1398*** The Ebrowse package implements a C++ class browser and tags
1399facilities tailored for use with C++. It is documented in a
1400separate Texinfo file.
1401
424d8b44
DL
1402+++
1403*** The PCL-CVS package available by either running M-x cvs-examine or
1404by visiting a CVS administrative directory (with a prefix argument)
1405provides an alternative interface to VC-dired for CVS. It comes with
1406`log-view-mode' to view RCS and SCCS logs and `log-edit-mode' used to
1407enter checkin log messages.
dc1178bf 1408
424d8b44 1409+++
6abca616
EZ
1410*** The new package called `woman' allows to browse Unix man pages
1411without invoking external programs.
1412
1413The command `M-x woman' formats manual pages entirely in Emacs Lisp
1414and then displays them, like `M-x manual-entry' does. Unlike
1415`manual-entry', `woman' does not invoke any external programs, so it
1416is useful on systems such as MS-DOS/MS-Windows where the `man' and
490f2e7b 1417Groff or `troff' commands are not readily available.
6abca616
EZ
1418
1419The command `M-x woman-find-file' asks for the file name of a man
1420page, then formats and displays it like `M-x woman' does.
1421
719e2c6e 1422+++
5e5dff44
GM
1423*** The new command M-x re-builder offers a convenient interface for
1424authoring regular expressions with immediate visual feedback.
1425
1426The buffer from which the command was called becomes the target for
1427the regexp editor popping up in a separate window. Matching text in
1428the target buffer is immediately color marked during the editing.
1429Each sub-expression of the regexp will show up in a different face so
1430even complex regexps can be edited and verified on target data in a
1431single step.
1432
1433On displays not supporting faces the matches instead blink like
1434matching parens to make them stand out. On such a setup you will
1435probably also want to use the sub-expression mode when the regexp
1436contains such to get feedback about their respective limits.
1437
424d8b44 1438+++
f7136ee8
GM
1439*** glasses-mode is a minor mode that makes
1440unreadableIdentifiersLikeThis readable. It works as glasses, without
1441actually modifying content of a buffer.
1442
bbd9b566
GM
1443*** The package ebnf2ps translates an EBNF to a syntactic chart in
1444PostScript.
1445
1446Currently accepts ad-hoc EBNF, ISO EBNF and Bison/Yacc.
1447
1448The ad-hoc default EBNF syntax has the following elements:
1449
1450 ; comment (until end of line)
1451 A non-terminal
1452 "C" terminal
1453 ?C? special
1454 $A default non-terminal
1455 $"C" default terminal
1456 $?C? default special
1457 A = B. production (A is the header and B the body)
1458 C D sequence (C occurs before D)
1459 C | D alternative (C or D occurs)
1460 A - B exception (A excluding B, B without any non-terminal)
1461 n * A repetition (A repeats n (integer) times)
1462 (C) group (expression C is grouped together)
1463 [C] optional (C may or not occurs)
1464 C+ one or more occurrences of C
1465 {C}+ one or more occurrences of C
1466 {C}* zero or more occurrences of C
1467 {C} zero or more occurrences of C
1468 C / D equivalent to: C {D C}*
1469 {C || D}+ equivalent to: C {D C}*
1470 {C || D}* equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1471 {C || D} equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1472
1473Please, see ebnf2ps documentation for EBNF syntax and how to use it.
1474
99453a38
GM
1475*** The package align.el will align columns within a region, using M-x
1476align. Its mode-specific rules, based on regular expressions,
1477determine where the columns should be split. In C and C++, for
1478example, it will align variable names in declaration lists, or the
1479equal signs of assignments.
1480
424d8b44 1481+++
559cee90
DL
1482*** `paragraph-indent-minor-mode' is a new minor mode supporting
1483paragraphs in the same style as `paragraph-indent-text-mode'.
1484
424d8b44 1485+++
6448a6b3
GM
1486*** bs.el is a new package for buffer selection similar to
1487list-buffers or electric-buffer-list. Use M-x bs-show to display a
1488buffer menu with this package. You can use M-x bs-customize to
1489customize the package.
1490
6344985d
GM
1491*** find-lisp.el is a package emulating the Unix find command in Lisp.
1492
249652b1
GM
1493*** calculator.el is a small calculator package that is intended to
1494replace desktop calculators such as xcalc and calc.exe. Actually, it
1495is not too small - it has more features than most desktop calculators,
1496and can be customized easily to get many more functions. It should
1497not be confused with "calc" which is a much bigger mathematical tool
1498which answers different needs.
1499
424d8b44 1500+++
3476b54a
GM
1501*** The minor modes cwarn-mode and global-cwarn-mode highlights
1502suspicious C and C++ constructions. Currently, assignments inside
1503expressions, semicolon following `if', `for' and `while' (except, of
1504course, after a `do .. while' statement), and C++ functions with
1505reference parameters are recognized. The modes require font-lock mode
1506to be enabled.
1507
424d8b44 1508+++
8964fec7
SM
1509*** smerge-mode.el provides `smerge-mode', a simple minor-mode for files
1510containing diff3-style conflict markers, such as generated by RCS.
1511
424d8b44 1512+++
a933dad1
DL
1513*** 5x5.el is a simple puzzle game.
1514
424d8b44 1515+++
a933dad1
DL
1516*** hl-line.el provides a minor mode to highlight the current line.
1517
1518*** ansi-color.el translates ANSI terminal escapes into text-properties.
1519
1520*** delphi.el provides a major mode for editing the Delphi (Object
1521Pascal) language.
1522
f6499c03 1523+++
a933dad1
DL
1524*** quickurl.el provides a simple method of inserting a URL based on
1525the text at point.
1526
1527*** sql.el provides an interface to SQL data bases.
1528
424d8b44 1529+++
8d54eb69
DL
1530*** fortune.el uses the fortune program to create mail/news signatures.
1531
a933dad1
DL
1532*** whitespace.el ???
1533
ebcfda83
GM
1534*** PostScript mode (ps-mode) is a new major mode for editing PostScript
1535files. It offers: interaction with a PostScript interpreter, including
1536(very basic) error handling; fontification, easily customizable for
1537interpreter messages; auto-indentation; insertion of EPSF templates and
1538often used code snippets; viewing of BoundingBox; commenting out /
1539uncommenting regions; conversion of 8bit characters to PostScript octal
1540codes. All functionality is accessible through a menu.
1541
1542*** delim-col helps to prettify columns in a text region or rectangle.
1543
1544Here is an example of columns:
1545
1546horse apple bus
1547dog pineapple car EXTRA
1548porcupine strawberry airplane
1549
1550Doing the following settings:
1551
1552 (setq delimit-columns-str-before "[ ")
1553 (setq delimit-columns-str-after " ]")
1554 (setq delimit-columns-str-separator ", ")
1555 (setq delimit-columns-separator "\t")
1556
1557
1558Selecting the lines above and typing:
1559
1560 M-x delimit-columns-region
1561
1562It results:
1563
1564[ horse , apple , bus , ]
1565[ dog , pineapple , car , EXTRA ]
1566[ porcupine, strawberry, airplane, ]
1567
1568delim-col has the following options:
1569
1570 delimit-columns-str-before Specify a string to be inserted
1571 before all columns.
1572
1573 delimit-columns-str-separator Specify a string to be inserted
1574 between each column.
1575
1576 delimit-columns-str-after Specify a string to be inserted
1577 after all columns.
1578
1579 delimit-columns-separator Specify a regexp which separates
1580 each column.
1581
1582delim-col has the following commands:
1583
1584 delimit-columns-region Prettify all columns in a text region.
1585 delimit-columns-rectangle Prettify all columns in a text rectangle.
1586
424d8b44 1587+++
f507826c 1588*** The package recentf.el maintains a menu for visiting files that
31fc5d15
GM
1589were operated on recently.
1590
1591M-x recentf-mode RET toggles recentf mode.
f507826c 1592
31fc5d15
GM
1593M-x customize-variable RET recentf-mode RET can be used to enable
1594recentf at Emacs startup.
f507826c 1595
31fc5d15
GM
1596M-x customize-variable RET recentf-menu-filter RET to specify a menu
1597filter function to change the menu appearance. For example, the recent
1598file list can be displayed:
f507826c 1599
31fc5d15
GM
1600- organized by major modes, directories or user defined rules.
1601- sorted by file pathes, file names, ascending or descending.
1602- showing pathes relative to the current default-directory
f507826c 1603
31fc5d15
GM
1604The `recentf-filter-changer' menu filter function allows to
1605dynamically change the menu appearance.
f507826c 1606
8062f458
DL
1607*** elide-head.el provides a mechanism for eliding boilerplate header
1608text.
1609
424d8b44 1610+++
36e24b82 1611*** footnote.el provides `footnote-mode', a minor mode supporting use
91735437
DL
1612of footnotes. It is intended for use with Message mode, but isn't
1613specific to Message mode.
1614
424d8b44 1615+++
36e24b82
DL
1616*** diff-mode.el provides `diff-mode', a major mode for
1617viewing/editing context diffs (patches). It is selected for files
1618with extension `.diff', `.diffs', `.patch' and `.rej'.
1619
424d8b44 1620+++
aaa659ef
DL
1621*** EUDC, the Emacs Unified Directory Client, provides a common user
1622interface to access directory servers using different directory
1623protocols. It has a separate manual.
1624
eee54b0e
DL
1625*** autoconf.el provides a major mode for editing configure.in files
1626for Autoconf, selected automatically.
1627
424d8b44 1628+++
612839b6
GM
1629*** windmove.el provides moving between windows.
1630
5d94f558 1631*** crm.el provides a facility to read multiple strings from the
612839b6 1632minibuffer with completion.
aaa659ef 1633
399da7e3
DL
1634*** todo-mode.el provides management of TODO lists and integration
1635with the diary features.
1636
6e417ca5
DL
1637*** autoarg.el provides a feature reported from Twenex Emacs whereby
1638numeric keys supply prefix args rather than self inserting.
1639
4a27bdfb
GM
1640*** The function `turn-off-auto-fill' unconditionally turns off Auto
1641Fill mode.
1642
a933dad1
DL
1643** Withdrawn packages
1644
1645*** mldrag.el has been removed. mouse.el provides the same
1646functionality with aliases for the mldrag functions.
25a81338 1647
3261c1d8
DL
1648*** eval-reg.el has been obsoleted by changes to edebug.el and removed.
1649
1650*** ph.el has been obsoleted by EUDC and removed.
ce75fd23
GM
1651
1652\f
1653* Lisp changes made after edition 2.6 of the Emacs Lisp Manual,
1654(Display-related features are described in a page of their own below.)
1655
47e351a3
GM
1656** In image specifications, `:heuristic-mask' has been replaced
1657with the more general `:mask' property.
1658
ba9eeda1
GM
1659** Image specifications accept more `:algorithm's.
1660
a2bd77b8
GM
1661** A `?' can be used in a symbol name without escaping it with a
1662backslash.
1663
424d8b44
DL
1664+++
1665** Reading from the mini-buffer now reads from standard input if Emacs
1666is running in batch mode. For example,
1667
1668 (message "%s" (read t))
1669
1670will read a Lisp expression from standard input and print the result
1671to standard output.
1672
1673+++
1674** The argument of `down-list', `backward-up-list', `up-list',
1675`kill-sexp', `backward-kill-sexp' and `mark-sexp' is now optional.
1676
ead53494
GM
1677** If `display-buffer-reuse-frames' is set, function `display-buffer'
1678will raise frames displaying a buffer, instead of creating a new
1679frame or window.
1680
f6499c03 1681+++
27848c01
GM
1682** Two new functions for removing elements from lists/sequences
1683were added
1684
1685- Function: remove ELT SEQ
1686
1687Return a copy of SEQ with all occurences of ELT removed. SEQ must be
1688a list, vector, or string. The comparison is done with `equal'.
1689
1690- Function: remq ELT LIST
1691
1692Return a copy of LIST with all occurences of ELT removed. The
1693comparison is done with `eq'.
1694
1695** The function `delete' now also works with vectors and strings.
3ab82477 1696
b548072f
GM
1697** The meaning of the `:weakness WEAK' argument of make-hash-table
1698has been changed.
1699
424d8b44 1700+++
07b14857
KH
1701** Function `aset' stores any multibyte character in any string
1702without signaling "Attempt to change char length of a string". It may
1703convert a unibyte string to multibyte if necessary.
1704
9662da0b
GM
1705** The value of the `help-echo' text property is called as a function
1706or evaluated, if it is not a string already, to obtain a help string.
d5aa31d8 1707
7fce7efb
DL
1708** Function `make-obsolete' now has an optional arg to say when the
1709function was declared obsolete.
1710
5d94f558 1711** Function `plist-member' is renamed from `widget-plist-member' (which is
7fce7efb
DL
1712retained as an alias).
1713
f98d3086
SM
1714** Easy-menu's :filter now works as in XEmacs.
1715It takes the unconverted (i.e. XEmacs) form of the menu and the result
1716is automatically converted to Emacs' form.
1717
87efd256
GM
1718** The new function `window-list' has been defined
1719
1720- Function: window-list &optional WINDOW MINIBUF ALL-FRAMES
1721
1722Return a list of windows in canonical order. The parameters WINDOW,
1723MINIBUF and ALL-FRAMES are defined like for `next-window'.
1724
67c9a1d2
GM
1725** There's a new function `some-window' defined as follows
1726
1727- Function: some-window PREDICATE &optional MINIBUF ALL-FRAMES DEFAULT
1728
1729Return a window satisfying PREDICATE.
1730
1731This function cycles through all visible windows using `walk-windows',
1732calling PREDICATE on each one. PREDICATE is called with a window as
1733argument. The first window for which PREDICATE returns a non-nil
1734value is returned. If no window satisfies PREDICATE, DEFAULT is
1735returned.
1736
1737Optional second arg MINIBUF t means count the minibuffer window even
1738if not active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means count the minibuffer iff
1739it is active. MINIBUF neither t nor nil means not to count the
1740minibuffer even if it is active.
1741
1742Several frames may share a single minibuffer; if the minibuffer
1743counts, all windows on all frames that share that minibuffer count
1744too. Therefore, if you are using a separate minibuffer frame
1745and the minibuffer is active and MINIBUF says it counts,
1746`walk-windows' includes the windows in the frame from which you
1747entered the minibuffer, as well as the minibuffer window.
1748
1749ALL-FRAMES is the optional third argument.
1750ALL-FRAMES nil or omitted means cycle within the frames as specified above.
1751ALL-FRAMES = `visible' means include windows on all visible frames.
1752ALL-FRAMES = 0 means include windows on all visible and iconified frames.
1753ALL-FRAMES = t means include windows on all frames including invisible frames.
1754If ALL-FRAMES is a frame, it means include windows on that frame.
1755Anything else means restrict to the selected frame.
1756
ead53494
GM
1757** The function `single-key-description' now encloses function key and
1758event names in angle brackets. When called with a second optional
1759argument non-nil, angle brackets won't be printed.
dce6b995 1760
25fa6deb
GM
1761** If the variable `message-truncate-lines' is bound to t around a
1762call to `message', the echo area will not be resized to display that
088831a6
GM
1763message; it will be truncated instead, as it was done in 20.x.
1764Default value is nil.
25fa6deb 1765
5d94f558 1766** The user option `line-number-display-limit' can now be set to nil,
1681ead6
GM
1767meaning no limit.
1768
5d94f558 1769** `select-safe-coding-system' now also checks the most preferred
c08398de
DL
1770coding-system if buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and
1771DEFAULT-CODING-SYSTEM is not specified,
1772
80c05bd3 1773** The function `subr-arity' provides information on the argument list
de370c4c
DL
1774of a primitive.
1775
80c05bd3
DL
1776** The text property `keymap' specifies a key map which overrides the
1777buffer's local map and the map specified by the `local-map' property.
1778This is probably what most current uses of `local-map' want, rather
1779than replacing the local map.
1780
4bc7a543
DL
1781** The obsolete variables before-change-function and
1782after-change-function are no longer acted upon and have been removed.
45f485a6
GM
1783
1784** The function `apropos-mode' runs the hook `apropos-mode-hook'.
1785
f6499c03 1786+++
f0298744
DL
1787** `concat' no longer accepts individual integer arguments, as
1788promised long ago.
1789
5d94f558 1790** The new function `float-time' returns the current time as a float.
a933dad1
DL
1791\f
1792* Lisp changes in Emacs 21.1 (see following page for display-related features)
1793
1794Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
1795--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
1796When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
1797so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
1798
85c75536
MB
1799*** The special form `save-restriction' now works correctly even if the
1800buffer is widened inside the save-restriction and changes made outside
1801the original restriction. Previously, doing this would cause the saved
1802restriction to be restored incorrectly.
1803
0b8a3a6d
DL
1804*** The functions `find-charset-region' and `find-charset-string' include
1805`eight-bit-control' and/or `eight-bit-graphic' in the returned list
1806when it finds 8-bit characters. Previously, it included `ascii' in a
1807multibyte buffer and `unknown' in a unibyte buffer.
1808
1809*** The functions `set-buffer-modified', `string-as-multibyte' and
1810`string-as-unibyte' change the byte sequence of a buffer if it
1811contains a character from the `eight-bit-control' character set.
1812
1813*** The handling of multibyte sequences in a multibyte buffer is
1814changed. Previously, a byte sequence matching the pattern
1815[\200-\237][\240-\377]+ was interpreted as a single character
1816regardless of the length of the trailing bytes [\240-\377]+. Thus, if
1817the sequence was longer than what the leading byte indicated, the
1818extra trailing bytes were ignored by Lisp functions. Now such extra
1819bytes are independent 8-bit characters belonging to the charset
1820eight-bit-graphic.
1821
1822** Fontsets are now implemented using char-tables.
1823
1824A fontset can now be specified for for each independent character, for
1825a group of characters or for a character set rather than just for a
1826character set as previously.
1827
1828*** The arguments of the function `set-fontset-font' are changed.
1829They are NAME, CHARACTER, FONTNAME, and optional FRAME. The function
1830modifies fontset NAME to use FONTNAME for CHARACTER.
1831
1832CHARACTER may be a cons (FROM . TO), where FROM and TO are non-generic
1833characters. In that case FONTNAME is used for all characters in the
1834range FROM and TO (inclusive). CHARACTER may be a charset. In that
1835case FONTNAME is used for all character in the charset.
1836
1837FONTNAME may be a cons (FAMILY . REGISTRY), where FAMILY is the family
1838name of a font and REGSITRY is a registry name of a font.
1839
1840*** Variable x-charset-registry has been deleted. The default charset
1841registries of character sets are set in the default fontset
1842"fontset-default".
1843
1844*** The function `create-fontset-from-fontset-spec' ignores the second
1845argument STYLE-VARIANT. It never creates style-variant fontsets.
1846
1847** The method of composing characters is changed. Now character
1848composition is done by a special text property `composition' in
1849buffers and strings.
1850
1851*** Charset composition is deleted. Emacs never creates a `composite
1852character' which is an independent character with a unique character
1853code. Thus the following functions handling `composite characters'
1854have been deleted: composite-char-component,
1855composite-char-component-count, composite-char-composition-rule,
1856composite-char-composition-rule and decompose-composite-char delete.
1857The variables leading-code-composition and min-composite-char have
1858also been deleted.
1859
1860*** Three more glyph reference points are added. They can be used to
1861specify a composition rule. See the documentation of the variable
1862`reference-point-alist' for more detail.
1863
1864*** The function `compose-region' takes new arguments COMPONENTS and
1865MODIFICATION-FUNC. With COMPONENTS, you can specify not only a
1866composition rule but also characters to be composed. Such characters
1867may differ between buffer and string text.
1868
1869*** The function `compose-string' takes new arguments START, END,
1870COMPONENTS, and MODIFICATION-FUNC.
1871
1872*** The function `compose-string' puts text property `composition'
1873directly on the argument STRING instead of returning a new string.
1874Likewise, the function `decompose-string' just removes text property
1875`composition' from STRING.
1876
1877*** The new function `find-composition' returns information about
1878a composition at a specified position in a buffer or a string.
1879
1880*** The function `decompose-composite-char' is now labeled as
1881obsolete.
1882
1883** The new character set `mule-unicode-0100-24ff' is introduced for
1884Unicode characters of the range U+0100..U+24FF. Currently, this
1885character set is not used.
1886
1887** The new character sets `japanese-jisx0213-1' and
1888`japanese-jisx0213-2' are introduced for the new Japanese standard JIS
1889X 0213 Plane 1 and Plane 2.
1890
1891+++
1892** The new character sets `eight-bit-control' and `eight-bit-graphic'
1893are introduced for 8-bit characters in the ranges 0x80..0x9F and
f98d3086 18940xA0..0xFF respectively.
0b8a3a6d 1895
399da7e3 1896+++
f0124b4a
DL
1897** If the APPEND argument of `write-region' is an integer, it seeks to
1898that offset in the file before writing.
1899
f98d3086
SM
1900** The function `add-minor-mode' has been added for convenience and
1901compatibility with XEmacs (and is used internally by define-minor-mode).
7464346d 1902
612839b6
GM
1903** The function `shell-command' now sets the default directory of the
1904`*Shell Command Output*' buffer to the default directory of the buffer
1905from which the command was issued.
1906
1907** The functions `query-replace', `query-replace-regexp',
1908`query-replace-regexp-eval' `map-query-replace-regexp',
1909`replace-string', `replace-regexp', and `perform-replace' take two
1910additional optional arguments START and END that specify the region to
1911operate on.
1912
271b4185
GM
1913** The new function `count-screen-lines' is a more flexible alternative
1914to `window-buffer-height'.
1915
1916- Function: count-screen-lines &optional BEG END COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE WINDOW
1917
1918Return the number of screen lines in the region between BEG and END.
1919The number of screen lines may be different from the number of actual
1920lines, due to line breaking, display table, etc.
1921
1922Optional arguments BEG and END default to `point-min' and `point-max'
1923respectively.
1924
1925If region ends with a newline, ignore it unless optinal third argument
1926COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE is non-nil.
1927
1928The optional fourth argument WINDOW specifies the window used for
1929obtaining parameters such as width, horizontal scrolling, and so
1930on. The default is to use the selected window's parameters.
1931
1932Like `vertical-motion', `count-screen-lines' always uses the current
1933buffer, regardless of which buffer is displayed in WINDOW. This makes
1934possible to use `count-screen-lines' in any buffer, whether or not it
1935is currently displayed in some window.
1936
3c30cb6e
DL
1937** The new function `mapc' is like `mapcar' but doesn't collect the
1938argument function's results.
1939
62f20204
GM
1940** The functions base64-decode-region and base64-decode-string now
1941signal an error instead of returning nil if decoding fails.
1942
c0510d27
GM
1943** The function sendmail-user-agent-compose now recognizes a `body'
1944header is the list of headers passed to it.
1945
1946** The new function member-ignore-case works like `member', but
1947ignores differences in case and text representation.
1948
1949** The buffer-local variable cursor-type can be used to specify the
19d1bc27
GM
1950cursor to use in windows displaying a buffer. Values are interpreted
1951as follows:
1952
1953 t use the cursor specified for the frame (default)
1954 nil don't display a cursor
1955 `bar' display a bar cursor with default width
1956 (bar . WIDTH) display a bar cursor with width WIDTH
1957 others display a box cursor.
1958
9a0dd3dc
GM
1959** The variable open-paren-in-column-0-is-defun-start controls whether
1960an open parenthesis in column 0 is considered to be the start of a
1961defun. If set, the default, it is considered a defun start. If not
1962set, an open parenthesis in column 0 has no special meaning.
1963
d7b511c4 1964** The new function `string-to-syntax' can be used to translate syntax
dc1178bf 1965specifications in string form as accepted by `modify-syntax-entry' to
d7b511c4
GM
1966the cons-cell form that is used for the values of the `syntax-table'
1967text property, and in `font-lock-syntactic-keywords'.
1968
1969Example:
1970
1971 (string-to-syntax "()")
1972 => (4 . 41)
1973
1fa28578
GM
1974** Emacs' reader supports CL read syntax for integers in bases
1975other than 10.
1976
1977*** `#BINTEGER' or `#bINTEGER' reads INTEGER in binary (radix 2).
1978INTEGER optionally contains a sign.
1979
5d94f558 1980 #b1111
1fa28578 1981 => 15
5d94f558 1982 #b-1111
1fa28578
GM
1983 => -15
1984
1985*** `#OINTEGER' or `#oINTEGER' reads INTEGER in octal (radix 8).
1986
5d94f558 1987 #o666
1fa28578
GM
1988 => 438
1989
1990*** `#XINTEGER' or `#xINTEGER' reads INTEGER in hexadecimal (radix 16).
1991
5d94f558 1992 #xbeef
1fa28578
GM
1993 => 48815
1994
1995*** `#RADIXrINTEGER' reads INTEGER in radix RADIX, 2 <= RADIX <= 36.
1996
5d94f558 1997 #2R-111
1fa28578 1998 => -7
5d94f558 1999 #25rah
1fa28578
GM
2000 => 267
2001
3d4ff2dd 2002** The function `documentation-property' now evaluates the value of
f98d3086 2003the given property to obtain a string if it doesn't refer to etc/DOC
e9b4e5ff
GM
2004and isn't a string.
2005
3d4ff2dd
GM
2006** If called for a symbol, the function `documentation' now looks for
2007a `function-documentation' property of that symbol. If it has a non-nil
2008value, the documentation is taken from that value. If the value is
2009not a string, it is evaluated to obtain a string.
2010
16ce590d
DL
2011+++
2012** The last argument of `define-key-after' defaults to t for convenience.
2013
73825616 2014** The new function `replace-regexp-in-string' replaces all matches
16ce590d
DL
2015for a regexp in a string.
2016
2017** `mouse-position' now runs the abnormal hook
2018`mouse-position-function'.
2019
723e779c
GM
2020** The function string-to-number now returns a float for numbers
2021that don't fit into a Lisp integer.
2022
d1e103b2
GM
2023** The variable keyword-symbols-constants-flag has been removed.
2024Keywords are now always considered constants.
2025
31047e0d
DL
2026+++
2027** The new function `delete-and-extract-region' deletes text and
2028returns it.
2029
7a85e4df
GM
2030** The function `clear-this-command-keys' now also clears the vector
2031returned by function `recent-keys'.
2032
02b14400
RS
2033+++
2034** Variables `beginning-of-defun-function' and `end-of-defun-function'
2035can be used to define handlers for the functions that find defuns.
2036Major modes can define these locally instead of rebinding M-C-a
2037etc. if the normal conventions for defuns are not appropriate for the
2038mode.
404fa7d6 2039
02b14400 2040+++
8964fec7
SM
2041** easy-mmode-define-minor-mode now takes an additional BODY argument
2042and is renamed `define-minor-mode'.
2043
02b14400
RS
2044+++
2045** If an abbrev has a hook function which is a symbol, and that symbol
2046has a non-nil `no-self-insert' property, the return value of the hook
2047function specifies whether an expansion has been done or not. If it
2048returns nil, abbrev-expand also returns nil, meaning "no expansion has
2049been performed."
2050
2051When abbrev expansion is done by typing a self-inserting character,
2052and the abbrev has a hook with the `no-self-insert' property, and the
2053hook function returns non-nil meaning expansion has been done,
2054then the self-inserting character is not inserted.
ef961722 2055
02b14400 2056+++
81da8b32
GM
2057** The function `intern-soft' now accepts a symbol as first argument.
2058In this case, that exact symbol is looked up in the specified obarray,
2059and the function's value is nil if it is not found.
2060
02b14400 2061+++
9e207b90
GM
2062** The new macro `with-syntax-table' can be used to evaluate forms
2063with the syntax table of the current buffer temporarily set to a
2064specified table.
2065
2066 (with-syntax-table TABLE &rest BODY)
2067
2068Evaluate BODY with syntax table of current buffer set to a copy of
03d9c64c
GM
2069TABLE. The current syntax table is saved, BODY is evaluated, and the
2070saved table is restored, even in case of an abnormal exit. Value is
2071what BODY returns.
9e207b90 2072
02b14400 2073+++
d7f89643 2074** Regular expressions now support intervals \{n,m\} as well as
95cd4c40 2075Perl's shy-groups \(?:...\) and non-greedy *? +? and ?? operators.
8964fec7 2076
02b14400 2077+++
dde9e75a
GM
2078** The optional argument BUFFER of function file-local-copy has been
2079removed since it wasn't used by anything.
2080
02b14400 2081+++
9da30515
GM
2082** The file name argument of function `file-locked-p' is now required
2083instead of being optional.
2084
02b14400 2085+++
d20679eb
GM
2086** The new built-in error `text-read-only' is signaled when trying to
2087modify read-only text.
2088
02b14400 2089+++
fbc164de
PE
2090** New functions and variables for locales.
2091
2092The new variable `locale-coding-system' specifies how to encode and
2093decode strings passed to low-level message functions like strerror and
b718982a
PE
2094time functions like strftime. The new variables
2095`system-messages-locale' and `system-time-locale' give the system
2096locales to be used when invoking these two types of functions.
fbc164de
PE
2097
2098The new function `set-locale-environment' sets the language
2099environment, preferred coding system, and locale coding system from
2100the system locale as specified by the LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG
b718982a
PE
2101environment variables. Normally, it is invoked during startup and need
2102not be invoked thereafter. It uses the new variables
2103`locale-language-names', `locale-charset-language-names', and
2104`locale-preferred-coding-systems' to make its decisions.
fbc164de 2105
02b14400 2106+++
863476d1
SM
2107** syntax tables now understand nested comments.
2108To declare a comment syntax as allowing nesting, just add an `n'
2109modifier to either of the characters of the comment end and the comment
2110start sequences.
2111
02b14400 2112+++
ef6d912c
GM
2113** The function `pixmap-spec-p' has been renamed `bitmap-spec-p'
2114because `bitmap' is more in line with the usual X terminology.
2115
02b14400 2116+++
a933dad1
DL
2117** New function `propertize'
2118
2119The new function `propertize' can be used to conveniently construct
2120strings with text properties.
2121
2122- Function: propertize STRING &rest PROPERTIES
2123
2124Value is a copy of STRING with text properties assigned as specified
2125by PROPERTIES. PROPERTIES is a sequence of pairs PROPERTY VALUE, with
2126PROPERTY being the name of a text property and VALUE being the
2127specified value of that property. Example:
2128
2129 (propertize "foo" 'face 'bold 'read-only t)
2130
2131+++
2132** push and pop macros.
2133
02b14400
RS
2134Simple versions of the push and pop macros of Common Lisp
2135are now defined in Emacs Lisp. These macros allow only symbols
a933dad1
DL
2136as the place that holds the list to be changed.
2137
2138(push NEWELT LISTNAME) add NEWELT to the front of LISTNAME's value.
2139(pop LISTNAME) return first elt of LISTNAME, and remove it
2140 (thus altering the value of LISTNAME).
2141
02b14400
RS
2142** New dolist and dotimes macros.
2143
6c7fd5aa
RS
2144Simple versions of the dolist and dotimes macros of Common Lisp
2145are now defined in Emacs Lisp.
02b14400
RS
2146
2147(dolist (VAR LIST [RESULT]) BODY...)
2148 Execute body once for each element of LIST,
2149 using the variable VAR to hold the current element.
2150 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
2151
2152(dotimes (VAR COUNT [RESULT]) BODY...)
2153 Execute BODY with VAR bound to successive integers running from 0,
2154 inclusive, to COUNT, exclusive.
2155 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
2156
a933dad1
DL
2157+++
2158** Regular expressions now support Posix character classes such
2159as [:alpha:], [:space:] and so on.
2160
2161[:digit:] matches 0 through 9
2162[:cntrl:] matches ASCII control characters
2163[:xdigit:] matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F.
2164[:blank:] matches space and tab only
2165[:graph:] matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars,
2166 space, and DEL.
2167[:print:] matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars
2168 and DEL.
2169[:alnum:] matches letters and digits.
2170 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2171 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
2172[:alpha:] matches letters.
2173 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2174 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
2175[:ascii:] matches ASCII (unibyte) characters.
2176[:nonascii:] matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters.
2177[:lower:] matches anything lower-case.
2178[:punct:] matches punctuation.
2179 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2180 it matches anything that has non-word syntax.)
2181[:space:] matches anything that has whitespace syntax.
2182[:upper:] matches anything upper-case.
2183[:word:] matches anything that has word syntax.
2184
2185+++
2186** Emacs now has built-in hash tables.
2187
2188The following functions are defined for hash tables:
2189
2190- Function: make-hash-table ARGS
2191
2192The argument list ARGS consists of keyword/argument pairs. All arguments
2193are optional. The following arguments are defined:
2194
2195:test TEST
2196
2197TEST must be a symbol specifying how to compare keys. Default is `eql'.
2198Predefined are `eq', `eql' and `equal'. If TEST is not predefined,
2199it must have been defined with `define-hash-table-test'.
2200
2201:size SIZE
2202
2203SIZE must be an integer > 0 giving a hint to the implementation how
2204many elements will be put in the hash table. Default size is 65.
2205
2206:rehash-size REHASH-SIZE
2207
2208REHASH-SIZE specifies by how much to grow a hash table once it becomes
2209full. If REHASH-SIZE is an integer, add that to the hash table's old
2210size to get the new size. Otherwise, REHASH-SIZE must be a float >
22111.0, and the new size is computed by multiplying REHASH-SIZE with the
2212old size. Default rehash size is 1.5.
2213
2214:rehash-threshold THRESHOLD
2215
2216THRESHOLD must be a float > 0 and <= 1.0 specifying when to resize the
2217hash table. It is resized when the ratio of (number of entries) /
2218(size of hash table) is >= THRESHOLD. Default threshold is 0.8.
2219
2220:weakness WEAK
2221
b548072f
GM
2222WEAK must be either nil, one of the symbols `key, `value',
2223`key-or-value', `key-and-value', or t, meaning the same as
2224`key-and-value'. Entries are removed from weak tables during garbage
2225collection if their key and/or value are not referenced elsewhere
2226outside of the hash table. Default are non-weak hash tables.
a933dad1
DL
2227
2228- Function: makehash &optional TEST
2229
2230Similar to make-hash-table, but only TEST can be specified.
2231
2232- Function: hash-table-p TABLE
2233
2234Returns non-nil if TABLE is a hash table object.
2235
2236- Function: copy-hash-table TABLE
2237
2238Returns a copy of TABLE. Only the table itself is copied, keys and
2239values are shared.
2240
2241- Function: hash-table-count TABLE
2242
2243Returns the number of entries in TABLE.
2244
2245- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
2246
2247Returns the rehash size of TABLE.
2248
2249- Function: hash-table-rehash-threshold TABLE
2250
2251Returns the rehash threshold of TABLE.
2252
2253- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
2254
2255Returns the size of TABLE.
2256
d96d6bb0 2257- Function: hash-table-test TABLE
a933dad1
DL
2258
2259Returns the test TABLE uses to compare keys.
2260
2261- Function: hash-table-weakness TABLE
2262
2263Returns the weakness specified for TABLE.
2264
2265- Function: clrhash TABLE
2266
2267Clear TABLE.
2268
2269- Function: gethash KEY TABLE &optional DEFAULT
2270
2271Look up KEY in TABLE and return its associated VALUE or DEFAULT if
2272not found.
2273
79214ddf 2274- Function: puthash KEY VALUE TABLE
a933dad1
DL
2275
2276Associate KEY with VALUE in TABLE. If KEY is already associated with
2277another value, replace the old value with VALUE.
2278
2279- Function: remhash KEY TABLE
2280
2281Remove KEY from TABLE if it is there.
2282
2283- Function: maphash FUNCTION TABLE
2284
2285Call FUNCTION for all elements in TABLE. FUNCTION must take two
2286arguments KEY and VALUE.
2287
2288- Function: sxhash OBJ
2289
2290Return a hash code for Lisp object OBJ.
2291
2292- Function: define-hash-table-test NAME TEST-FN HASH-FN
2293
2294Define a new hash table test named NAME. If NAME is specified as
2295a test in `make-hash-table', the table created will use TEST-FN for
79214ddf 2296comparing keys, and HASH-FN to compute hash codes for keys. Test
a933dad1
DL
2297and hash function are stored as symbol property `hash-table-test'
2298of NAME with a value of (TEST-FN HASH-FN).
2299
2300TEST-FN must take two arguments and return non-nil if they are the same.
2301
2302HASH-FN must take one argument and return an integer that is the hash
2303code of the argument. The function should use the whole range of
2304integer values for hash code computation, including negative integers.
2305
2306Example: The following creates a hash table whose keys are supposed to
2307be strings that are compared case-insensitively.
2308
2309 (defun case-fold-string= (a b)
2310 (compare-strings a nil nil b nil nil t))
2311
2312 (defun case-fold-string-hash (a)
2313 (sxhash (upcase a)))
2314
79214ddf 2315 (define-hash-table-test 'case-fold 'case-fold-string=
a933dad1
DL
2316 'case-fold-string-hash))
2317
2318 (make-hash-table :test 'case-fold)
2319
2320+++
2321** The Lisp reader handles circular structure.
2322
2323It now works to use the #N= and #N# constructs to represent
2324circular structures. For example, #1=(a . #1#) represents
2325a cons cell which is its own cdr.
2326
2327+++
2328** The Lisp printer handles circular structure.
2329
2330If you bind print-circle to a non-nil value, the Lisp printer outputs
2331#N= and #N# constructs to represent circular and shared structure.
2332
a933dad1
DL
2333+++
2334** If the second argument to `move-to-column' is anything but nil or
2335t, that means replace a tab with spaces if necessary to reach the
2336specified column, but do not add spaces at the end of the line if it
2337is too short to reach that column.
2338
2339+++
2340** perform-replace has a new feature: the REPLACEMENTS argument may
2341now be a cons cell (FUNCTION . DATA). This means to call FUNCTION
2342after each match to get the replacement text. FUNCTION is called with
2343two arguments: DATA, and the number of replacements already made.
2344
2345If the FROM-STRING contains any upper-case letters,
2346perform-replace also turns off `case-fold-search' temporarily
2347and inserts the replacement text without altering case in it.
2348
2349+++
2350** The function buffer-size now accepts an optional argument
2351to specify which buffer to return the size of.
2352
2353+++
2354** The calendar motion commands now run the normal hook
2355calendar-move-hook after moving point.
2356
2357+++
2358** The new variable small-temporary-file-directory specifies a
2359directory to use for creating temporary files that are likely to be
2360small. (Certain Emacs features use this directory.) If
2361small-temporary-file-directory is nil, they use
2362temporary-file-directory instead.
2363
2364+++
2365** The variable `inhibit-modification-hooks', if non-nil, inhibits all
2366the hooks that track changes in the buffer. This affects
2367`before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions', as well as
2368hooks attached to text properties and overlay properties.
2369
2370+++
2371** assoc-delete-all is a new function that deletes all the
2372elements of an alist which have a particular value as the car.
2373
2374+++
2375** make-temp-file provides a more reliable way to create a temporary file.
2376
2377make-temp-file is used like make-temp-name, except that it actually
2378creates the file before it returns. This prevents a timing error,
2379ensuring that no other job can use the same name for a temporary file.
2380
2381+++
2382** New exclusive-open feature in `write-region'
2383
2384The optional seventh arg is now called MUSTBENEW. If non-nil, it insists
2385on a check for an existing file with the same name. If MUSTBENEW
2386is `excl', that means to get an error if the file already exists;
2387never overwrite. If MUSTBENEW is neither nil nor `excl', that means
2388ask for confirmation before overwriting, but do go ahead and
2389overwrite the file if the user gives confirmation.
2390
2391If the MUSTBENEW argument in `write-region' is `excl',
2392that means to use a special feature in the `open' system call
2393to get an error if the file exists at that time.
2394The error reported is `file-already-exists'.
2395
2396+++
2397** Function `format' now handles text properties.
2398
2399Text properties of the format string are applied to the result string.
2400If the result string is longer than the format string, text properties
2401ending at the end of the format string are extended to the end of the
2402result string.
2403
2404Text properties from string arguments are applied to the result
2405string where arguments appear in the result string.
2406
2407Example:
2408
2409 (let ((s1 "hello, %s")
2410 (s2 "world"))
2411 (put-text-property 0 (length s1) 'face 'bold s1)
2412 (put-text-property 0 (length s2) 'face 'italic s2)
b246b1f6 2413 (format s1 s2))
a933dad1
DL
2414
2415results in a bold-face string with an italic `world' at the end.
2416
2417+++
2418** Messages can now be displayed with text properties.
2419
2420Text properties are handled as described above for function `format'.
2421The following example displays a bold-face message with an italic
2422argument in it.
2423
2424 (let ((msg "hello, %s!")
2425 (arg "world"))
2426 (put-text-property 0 (length msg) 'face 'bold msg)
2427 (put-text-property 0 (length arg) 'face 'italic arg)
2428 (message msg arg))
2429
2430+++
2431** Sound support
2432
2433Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs
2434(Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver).
2435
2436Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio
2437(*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes'
2438to enable sound support.
2439
2440Sound files can be played by calling (play-sound SOUND). SOUND is a
2441list of the form `(sound PROPERTY...)'. The function is only defined
2442when sound support is present for the system on which Emacs runs. The
2443functions runs `play-sound-functions' with one argument which is the
2444sound to play, before playing the sound.
2445
2446The following sound properties are supported:
2447
2448- `:file FILE'
2449
2450FILE is a file name. If FILE isn't an absolute name, it will be
2451searched relative to `data-directory'.
2452
6fb40beb
GM
2453- `:data DATA'
2454
2455DATA is a string containing sound data. Either :file or :data
2456may be present, but not both.
2457
a933dad1
DL
2458- `:volume VOLUME'
2459
2460VOLUME must be an integer in the range 0..100 or a float in the range
24610..1. This property is optional.
2462
2463Other properties are ignored.
2464
2465** `multimedia' is a new Finder keyword and Custom group.
356673d4
DL
2466
2467** keywordp is a new predicate to test efficiently for an object being
2468a keyword symbol.
fc91dc2d
GM
2469
2470** Changes to garbage collection
2471
2472*** The function garbage-collect now additionally returns the number
2473of live and free strings.
2474
2475*** There is a new variable `strings-consed' holding the number of
2476strings that have been consed so far.
2477
a933dad1 2478\f
04545643
GM
2479* Lisp-level Display features added after release 2.6 of the Emacs
2480Lisp Manual
2481
82a452c8
GM
2482*** On window systems, `glyph-table' is no longer used.
2483
9a8d84ca
DL
2484+++
2485** Help strings in menu items are now used to provide `help-echo' text.
2c69ced2
GM
2486
2487** The function `image-size' can be used to determine the size of an
2488image.
2489
2490- Function: image-size SPEC &optional PIXELS FRAME
2491
2492Return the size of an image as a pair (WIDTH . HEIGHT).
2493
2494SPEC is an image specification. PIXELS non-nil means return sizes
2495measured in pixels, otherwise return sizes measured in canonical
2496character units (fractions of the width/height of the frame's default
2497font). FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed.
2498FRAME nil or omitted means use the selected frame.
2499
ebb8f116
GM
2500** The function `image-mask-p' can be used to determine if an image
2501has a mask bitmap.
2502
2503- Function: image-mask-p SPEC &optional FRAME
2504
2505Return t if image SPEC has a mask bitmap.
2506FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed. FRAME nil
2507or omitted means use the selected frame.
2508
f6499c03 2509+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
2510** The function `find-image' can be used to find a usable image
2511satisfying one of a list of specifications.
2512
2513+++
2514** The STRING argument of `put-image' and `insert-image' is now
2515optional.
2516
f6499c03
DL
2517+++
2518** Image specifications may contain the property `:ascent center' (see
2519below).
04545643
GM
2520
2521\f
a933dad1
DL
2522* New Lisp-level Display features in Emacs 21.1
2523
2524Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
2525--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
2526When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
2527so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
2528
f6d3257b
GM
2529** The function tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors can be used
2530to make Emacs avoid displaying text with bold black foreground on TTYs.
2531
2532Some terminals, notably PC consoles, emulate bold text by displaying
2533text in brighter colors. On such a console, a bold black foreground
2534is displayed in a gray color. If this turns out to be hard to read on
2535your monitor---the problem occurred with the mode line on
2536laptops---you can instruct Emacs to ignore the text's boldness, and to
2537just display it black instead.
2538
2539This situation can't be detected automatically. You will have to put
2540a line like
2541
2542 (tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors t)
2543
2544in your `.emacs'.
2545
a933dad1
DL
2546** New face implementation.
2547
2548Emacs faces have been reimplemented from scratch. They don't use XLFD
2549font names anymore and face merging now works as expected.
2550
2551+++
2552*** New faces.
2553
2554Each face can specify the following display attributes:
2555
2556 1. Font family or fontset alias name.
79214ddf 2557
a933dad1
DL
2558 2. Relative proportionate width, aka character set width or set
2559 width (swidth), e.g. `semi-compressed'.
79214ddf 2560
a933dad1 2561 3. Font height in 1/10pt
79214ddf 2562
a933dad1 2563 4. Font weight, e.g. `bold'.
79214ddf 2564
a933dad1 2565 5. Font slant, e.g. `italic'.
79214ddf 2566
a933dad1 2567 6. Foreground color.
79214ddf 2568
a933dad1
DL
2569 7. Background color.
2570
2571 8. Whether or not characters should be underlined, and in what color.
2572
2573 9. Whether or not characters should be displayed in inverse video.
2574
2575 10. A background stipple, a bitmap.
2576
2577 11. Whether or not characters should be overlined, and in what color.
2578
2579 12. Whether or not characters should be strike-through, and in what
2580 color.
2581
2582 13. Whether or not a box should be drawn around characters, its
2583 color, the width of the box lines, and 3D appearance.
2584
2585Faces are frame-local by nature because Emacs allows to define the
2586same named face (face names are symbols) differently for different
2587frames. Each frame has an alist of face definitions for all named
2588faces. The value of a named face in such an alist is a Lisp vector
2589with the symbol `face' in slot 0, and a slot for each each of the face
2590attributes mentioned above.
2591
2592There is also a global face alist `face-new-frame-defaults'. Face
2593definitions from this list are used to initialize faces of newly
2594created frames.
79214ddf 2595
a933dad1
DL
2596A face doesn't have to specify all attributes. Those not specified
2597have a nil value. Faces specifying all attributes are called
2598`fully-specified'.
2599
2600+++
2601*** Face merging.
2602
2603The display style of a given character in the text is determined by
2604combining several faces. This process is called `face merging'. Any
2605aspect of the display style that isn't specified by overlays or text
2606properties is taken from the `default' face. Since it is made sure
2607that the default face is always fully-specified, face merging always
2608results in a fully-specified face.
2609
2610+++
2611*** Face realization.
2612
2613After all face attributes for a character have been determined by
2614merging faces of that character, that face is `realized'. The
2615realization process maps face attributes to what is physically
2616available on the system where Emacs runs. The result is a `realized
2617face' in form of an internal structure which is stored in the face
2618cache of the frame on which it was realized.
2619
2620Face realization is done in the context of the charset of the
2621character to display because different fonts and encodings are used
2622for different charsets. In other words, for characters of different
2623charsets, different realized faces are needed to display them.
2624
2625Except for composite characters, faces are always realized for a
2626specific character set and contain a specific font, even if the face
2627being realized specifies a fontset. The reason is that the result of
2628the new font selection stage is better than what can be done with
2629statically defined font name patterns in fontsets.
2630
2631In unibyte text, Emacs' charsets aren't applicable; function
2632`char-charset' reports ASCII for all characters, including those >
26330x7f. The X registry and encoding of fonts to use is determined from
2634the variable `face-default-registry' in this case. The variable is
2635initialized at Emacs startup time from the font the user specified for
2636Emacs.
2637
2638Currently all unibyte text, i.e. all buffers with
2639`enable-multibyte-characters' nil are displayed with fonts of the same
2640registry and encoding `face-default-registry'. This is consistent
2641with the fact that languages can also be set globally, only.
2642
2643++++
2644**** Clearing face caches.
2645
2646The Lisp function `clear-face-cache' can be called to clear face caches
2647on all frames. If called with a non-nil argument, it will also unload
2648unused fonts.
2649
2650+++
2651*** Font selection.
79214ddf 2652
a933dad1
DL
2653Font selection tries to find the best available matching font for a
2654given (charset, face) combination. This is done slightly differently
2655for faces specifying a fontset, or a font family name.
2656
2657If the face specifies a fontset name, that fontset determines a
2658pattern for fonts of the given charset. If the face specifies a font
2659family, a font pattern is constructed. Charset symbols have a
2660property `x-charset-registry' for that purpose that maps a charset to
2661an XLFD registry and encoding in the font pattern constructed.
2662
2663Available fonts on the system on which Emacs runs are then matched
2664against the font pattern. The result of font selection is the best
2665match for the given face attributes in this font list.
2666
2667Font selection can be influenced by the user.
2668
2669The user can specify the relative importance he gives the face
2670attributes width, height, weight, and slant by setting
2671face-font-selection-order (faces.el) to a list of face attribute
2672names. The default is (:width :height :weight :slant), and means
2673that font selection first tries to find a good match for the font
2674width specified by a face, then---within fonts with that width---tries
2675to find a best match for the specified font height, etc.
2676
2677Setting `face-alternative-font-family-alist' allows the user to
2678specify alternative font families to try if a family specified by a
2679face doesn't exist.
2680
2681+++
2682**** Scalable fonts
2683
2684Emacs can make use of scalable fonts but doesn't do so by default,
2685since the use of too many or too big scalable fonts may crash XFree86
2686servers.
2687
2688To enable scalable font use, set the variable
b246b1f6 2689`scalable-fonts-allowed'. A value of nil, the default, means never use
a933dad1
DL
2690scalable fonts. A value of t means any scalable font may be used.
2691Otherwise, the value must be a list of regular expressions. A
2692scalable font may then be used if it matches a regular expression from
2693that list. Example:
2694
2695 (setq scalable-fonts-allowed '("muleindian-2$"))
2696
2697allows the use of scalable fonts with registry `muleindian-2'.
2698
2699+++
2700*** Functions and variables related to font selection.
2701
2702- Function: x-family-fonts &optional FAMILY FRAME
2703
2704Return a list of available fonts of family FAMILY on FRAME. If FAMILY
2705is omitted or nil, list all families. Otherwise, FAMILY must be a
2706string, possibly containing wildcards `?' and `*'.
2707
2708If FRAME is omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Each element of
2709the result is a vector [FAMILY WIDTH POINT-SIZE WEIGHT SLANT FIXED-P
2710FULL REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING]. FAMILY is the font family name.
2711POINT-SIZE is the size of the font in 1/10 pt. WIDTH, WEIGHT, and
2712SLANT are symbols describing the width, weight and slant of the font.
2713These symbols are the same as for face attributes. FIXED-P is non-nil
2714if the font is fixed-pitch. FULL is the full name of the font, and
2715REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING is a string giving the registry and encoding of
2716the font. The result list is sorted according to the current setting
2717of the face font sort order.
2718
79214ddf 2719- Function: x-font-family-list
a933dad1
DL
2720
2721Return a list of available font families on FRAME. If FRAME is
2722omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Value is a list of conses
2723(FAMILY . FIXED-P) where FAMILY is a font family, and FIXED-P is
2724non-nil if fonts of that family are fixed-pitch.
2725
2726- Variable: font-list-limit
2727
2728Limit for font matching. If an integer > 0, font matching functions
2729won't load more than that number of fonts when searching for a
2730matching font. The default is currently 100.
2731
2732+++
2733*** Setting face attributes.
2734
2735For the most part, the new face implementation is interface-compatible
2736with the old one. Old face attribute related functions are now
2737implemented in terms of the new functions `set-face-attribute' and
2738`face-attribute'.
2739
2740Face attributes are identified by their names which are keyword
2741symbols. All attributes can be set to `unspecified'.
2742
2743The following attributes are recognized:
2744
2745`:family'
2746
2747VALUE must be a string specifying the font family, e.g. ``courier'',
2748or a fontset alias name. If a font family is specified, wild-cards `*'
2749and `?' are allowed.
2750
2751`:width'
2752
2753VALUE specifies the relative proportionate width of the font to use.
2754It must be one of the symbols `ultra-condensed', `extra-condensed',
2755`condensed', `semi-condensed', `normal', `semi-expanded', `expanded',
2756`extra-expanded', or `ultra-expanded'.
2757
2758`:height'
2759
787345ff
MB
2760VALUE must be either an integer specifying the height of the font to use
2761in 1/10 pt, a floating point number specifying the amount by which to
2762scale any underlying face, or a function, which is called with the old
2763height (from the underlying face), and should return the new height.
a933dad1
DL
2764
2765`:weight'
2766
2767VALUE specifies the weight of the font to use. It must be one of the
2768symbols `ultra-bold', `extra-bold', `bold', `semi-bold', `normal',
2769`semi-light', `light', `extra-light', `ultra-light'.
2770
2771`:slant'
2772
2773VALUE specifies the slant of the font to use. It must be one of the
2774symbols `italic', `oblique', `normal', `reverse-italic', or
2775`reverse-oblique'.
2776
2777`:foreground', `:background'
2778
2779VALUE must be a color name, a string.
2780
2781`:underline'
2782
2783VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be underlined. If
2784VALUE is t, underline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is
2785a string, underline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly
2786don't underline.
2787
2788`:overline'
2789
2790VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be overlined. If
2791VALUE is t, overline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is a
2792string, overline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't
2793overline.
2794
2795`:strike-through'
2796
2797VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be drawn with a line
2798striking through them. If VALUE is t, use the foreground color of the
2799face. If VALUE is a string, strike-through with that color. If VALUE
2800is nil, explicitly don't strike through.
2801
2802`:box'
2803
2804VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should have a box drawn
2805around them. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't draw boxes. If
2806VALUE is t, draw a box with lines of width 1 in the foreground color
2807of the face. If VALUE is a string, the string must be a color name,
2808and the box is drawn in that color with a line width of 1. Otherwise,
2809VALUE must be a property list of the form `(:line-width WIDTH
2810:color COLOR :style STYLE)'. If a keyword/value pair is missing from
2811the property list, a default value will be used for the value, as
2812specified below. WIDTH specifies the width of the lines to draw; it
2813defaults to 1. COLOR is the name of the color to draw in, default is
2814the foreground color of the face for simple boxes, and the background
2815color of the face for 3D boxes. STYLE specifies whether a 3D box
2816should be draw. If STYLE is `released-button', draw a box looking
2817like a released 3D button. If STYLE is `pressed-button' draw a box
2818that appears like a pressed button. If STYLE is nil, the default if
2819the property list doesn't contain a style specification, draw a 2D
2820box.
2821
2822`:inverse-video'
2823
2824VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be displayed in
2825inverse video. VALUE must be one of t or nil.
2826
2827`:stipple'
2828
2829If VALUE is a string, it must be the name of a file of pixmap data.
2830The directories listed in the `x-bitmap-file-path' variable are
2831searched. Alternatively, VALUE may be a list of the form (WIDTH
2832HEIGHT DATA) where WIDTH and HEIGHT are the size in pixels, and DATA
2833is a string containing the raw bits of the bitmap. VALUE nil means
2834explicitly don't use a stipple pattern.
2835
2836For convenience, attributes `:family', `:width', `:height', `:weight',
2837and `:slant' may also be set in one step from an X font name:
2838
2839`:font'
2840
2841Set font-related face attributes from VALUE. VALUE must be a valid
2842XLFD font name. If it is a font name pattern, the first matching font
2843is used--this is for compatibility with the behavior of previous
2844versions of Emacs.
2845
2846For compatibility with Emacs 20, keywords `:bold' and `:italic' can
2847be used to specify that a bold or italic font should be used. VALUE
2848must be t or nil in that case. A value of `unspecified' is not allowed."
2849
2850Please see also the documentation of `set-face-attribute' and
2851`defface'.
2852
787345ff
MB
2853`:inherit'
2854
2855VALUE is the name of a face from which to inherit attributes, or a list
2856of face names. Attributes from inherited faces are merged into the face
2857like an underlying face would be, with higher priority than underlying faces.
2858
a933dad1
DL
2859*** Face attributes and X resources
2860
2861The following X resource names can be used to set face attributes
2862from X resources:
2863
2864 Face attribute X resource class
2865-----------------------------------------------------------------------
2866 :family attributeFamily . Face.AttributeFamily
2867 :width attributeWidth Face.AttributeWidth
2868 :height attributeHeight Face.AttributeHeight
2869 :weight attributeWeight Face.AttributeWeight
2870 :slant attributeSlant Face.AttributeSlant
2871 foreground attributeForeground Face.AttributeForeground
2872 :background attributeBackground . Face.AttributeBackground
2873 :overline attributeOverline Face.AttributeOverline
2874 :strike-through attributeStrikeThrough Face.AttributeStrikeThrough
2875 :box attributeBox Face.AttributeBox
2876 :underline attributeUnderline Face.AttributeUnderline
2877 :inverse-video attributeInverse Face.AttributeInverse
2878 :stipple attributeStipple Face.AttributeStipple
79214ddf 2879 or attributeBackgroundPixmap
a933dad1
DL
2880 Face.AttributeBackgroundPixmap
2881 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
2882 :bold attributeBold Face.AttributeBold
2883 :italic attributeItalic . Face.AttributeItalic
2884 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
2885
2886+++
2887*** Text property `face'.
2888
2889The value of the `face' text property can now be a single face
2890specification or a list of such specifications. Each face
2891specification can be
2892
28931. A symbol or string naming a Lisp face.
2894
28952. A property list of the form (KEYWORD VALUE ...) where each
2896 KEYWORD is a face attribute name, and VALUE is an appropriate value
2897 for that attribute. Please see the doc string of `set-face-attribute'
2898 for face attribute names.
2899
29003. Conses of the form (FOREGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) or
2901 (BACKGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) where COLOR is a color name. This is
2902 for compatibility with previous Emacs versions.
2903
2904+++
2905** Support functions for colors on text-only terminals.
2906
acf3ecb7
EZ
2907The function `tty-color-define' can be used to define colors for use
2908on TTY and MSDOS frames. It maps a color name to a color number on
2909the terminal. Emacs defines a couple of common color mappings by
a933dad1 2910default. You can get defined colors with a call to
acf3ecb7 2911`defined-colors'. The function `tty-color-clear' can be
a933dad1
DL
2912used to clear the mapping table.
2913
acf3ecb7
EZ
2914** Unified support for colors independent of frame type.
2915
2916The new functions `defined-colors', `color-defined-p', `color-values',
2917and `display-color-p' work for any type of frame. On frames whose
2918type is neither x nor w32, these functions transparently map X-style
2919color specifications to the closest colors supported by the frame
2920display. Lisp programs should use these new functions instead of the
2921old `x-defined-colors', `x-color-defined-p', `x-color-values', and
2922`x-display-color-p'. (The old function names are still available for
2923compatibility; they are now aliases of the new names.) Lisp programs
2924should no more look at the value of the variable window-system to
2925modify their color-related behavior.
2926
2927The primitives `color-gray-p' and `color-supported-p' also work for
2928any frame type.
2929
8a5719f0
EZ
2930** Platform-independent functions to describe display capabilities.
2931
2932The new functions `display-mouse-p', `display-popup-menus-p',
2933`display-graphic-p', `display-selections-p', `display-screens',
2934`display-pixel-width', `display-pixel-height', `display-mm-width',
2935`display-mm-height', `display-backing-store', `display-save-under',
2936`display-planes', `display-color-cells', `display-visual-class', and
2937`display-grayscale-p' describe the basic capabilities of a particular
2938display. Lisp programs should call these functions instead of testing
2939the value of the variables `window-system' or `system-type', or calling
2940platform-specific functions such as `x-display-pixel-width'.
2941
a933dad1
DL
2942+++
2943** The minibuffer prompt is now actually inserted in the minibuffer.
a933dad1 2944
463cac2d 2945This makes it possible to scroll through the prompt, if you want to.
a933dad1
DL
2946
2947The function minubuffer-prompt-end returns the current position of the
2948end of the minibuffer prompt, if the minibuffer is current.
2949Otherwise, it returns zero.
2950
463cac2d
GM
2951** New `field' abstraction in buffers.
2952
2953There is now code to support an abstraction called `fields' in emacs
2954buffers. A field is a contiguous region of text with the same `field'
59927f88 2955property (which can be a text property or an overlay).
463cac2d 2956
9a9dfda8 2957Many emacs functions, such as forward-word, forward-sentence,
463cac2d 2958forward-paragraph, beginning-of-line, etc., stop moving when they come
9a9dfda8 2959to the boundary between fields; beginning-of-line and end-of-line will
463cac2d 2960not let the point move past the field boundary, but other movement
fc7ac24f
GM
2961commands continue into the next field if repeated. Stopping at field
2962boundaries can be suppressed programmatically by binding
2963`inhibit-field-text-motion' to a non-nil value around calls to these
2964functions.
463cac2d
GM
2965
2966Now that the minibuffer prompt is inserted into the minibuffer, it is in
9a9dfda8 2967a separate field from the user-input part of the buffer, so that common
463cac2d 2968editing commands treat the user's text separately from the prompt.
a933dad1 2969
9a9dfda8
GM
2970The following functions are defined for operating on fields:
2971
59927f88 2972- Function: constrain-to-field NEW-POS OLD-POS &optional ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE ONLY-IN-LINE INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY
9a9dfda8
GM
2973
2974Return the position closest to NEW-POS that is in the same field as OLD-POS.
59927f88 2975
9a9dfda8
GM
2976A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2977If NEW-POS is nil, then the current point is used instead, and set to the
2978constrained position if that is is different.
2979
2980If OLD-POS is at the boundary of two fields, then the allowable
2981positions for NEW-POS depends on the value of the optional argument
2982ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE: If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is nil, then NEW-POS is
59927f88 2983constrained to the field that has the same `field' char-property
9a9dfda8
GM
2984as any new characters inserted at OLD-POS, whereas if ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
2985is non-nil, NEW-POS is constrained to the union of the two adjacent
59927f88
MB
2986fields. Additionally, if two fields are separated by another field with
2987the special value `boundary', then any point within this special field is
2988also considered to be `on the boundary'.
9a9dfda8
GM
2989
2990If the optional argument ONLY-IN-LINE is non-nil and constraining
2991NEW-POS would move it to a different line, NEW-POS is returned
2992unconstrained. This useful for commands that move by line, like
2993C-n or C-a, which should generally respect field boundaries
2994only in the case where they can still move to the right line.
2995
59927f88
MB
2996If the optional argument INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY is non-nil, and OLD-POS has
2997a non-nil property of that name, then any field boundaries are ignored.
2998
2999Field boundaries are not noticed if `inhibit-field-text-motion' is non-nil.
3000
3001- Function: delete-field &optional POS
9a9dfda8 3002
59927f88 3003Delete the field surrounding POS.
9a9dfda8 3004A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 3005If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8
GM
3006
3007- Function: field-beginning &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
3008
3009Return the beginning of the field surrounding POS.
3010A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88
MB
3011If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
3012If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the beginning of its
9a9dfda8
GM
3013field, then the beginning of the *previous* field is returned.
3014
3015- Function: field-end &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
3016
3017Return the end of the field surrounding POS.
3018A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88
MB
3019If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
3020If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the end of its field,
9a9dfda8
GM
3021then the end of the *following* field is returned.
3022
3023- Function: field-string &optional POS
3024
3025Return the contents of the field surrounding POS as a string.
3026A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 3027If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8
GM
3028
3029- Function: field-string-no-properties &optional POS
3030
3031Return the contents of the field around POS, without text-properties.
3032A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 3033If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8 3034
a933dad1
DL
3035+++
3036** Image support.
3037
3038Emacs can now display images. Images are inserted into text by giving
3039strings or buffer text a `display' text property containing one of
3040(AREA IMAGE) or IMAGE. The display of the `display' property value
3041replaces the display of the characters having that property.
3042
3043If the property value has the form (AREA IMAGE), AREA must be one of
3044`(margin left-margin)', `(margin right-margin)' or `(margin nil)'. If
3045AREA is `(margin nil)', IMAGE will be displayed in the text area of a
3046window, otherwise it will be displayed in the left or right marginal
3047area.
3048
3049IMAGE is an image specification.
3050
3051*** Image specifications
3052
3053Image specifications are lists of the form `(image PROPS)' where PROPS
3054is a property list whose keys are keyword symbols. Each
3055specifications must contain a property `:type TYPE' with TYPE being a
35a5514b
GM
3056symbol specifying the image type, e.g. `xbm'. Properties not
3057described below are ignored.
a933dad1
DL
3058
3059The following is a list of properties all image types share.
3060
3061`:ascent ASCENT'
3062
576da55d
GM
3063ASCENT must be a number in the range 0..100, or the symbol `center'.
3064If it is a number, it specifies the percentage of the image's height
5d94f558 3065to use for its ascent.
576da55d
GM
3066
3067If not specified, ASCENT defaults to the value 50 which means that the
3068image will be centered with the base line of the row it appears in.
3069
5d94f558 3070If ASCENT is `center' the image is vertically centered around a
04545643
GM
3071centerline which is the vertical center of text drawn at the position
3072of the image, in the manner specified by the text properties and
3073overlays that apply to the image.
a933dad1
DL
3074
3075`:margin MARGIN'
3076
79214ddf 3077MARGIN must be a number >= 0 specifying how many pixels to put as
a933dad1
DL
3078margin around the image. Default is 0.
3079
3080`:relief RELIEF'
3081
3082RELIEF is analogous to the `:relief' attribute of faces. Puts a relief
3083around an image.
3084
3085`:algorithm ALGO'
3086
47e351a3
GM
3087Apply an image algorithm to the image before displaying it.
3088
3089ALGO `laplace' or `emboss' means apply a Laplace or ``emboss''
3090edge-detection algorithm to the image.
3091
3092ALGO `(edge-detection :matrix MATRIX :color-adjust ADJUST)' means
3093apply a general edge-detection algorithm. MATRIX must be either a
3094nine-element list or a nine-element vector of numbers. A pixel at
3095position x/y in the transformed image is computed from original pixels
3096around that position. MATRIX specifies, for each pixel in the
3097neighborhood of x/y, a factor with which that pixel will influence the
3098transformed pixel; element 0 specifies the factor for the pixel at
3099x-1/y-1, element 1 the factor for the pixel at x/y-1 etc. as shown
3100below.
3101
3102 (x-1/y-1 x/y-1 x+1/y-1
3103 x-1/y x/y x+1/y
3104 x-1/y+1 x/y+1 x+1/y+1)
3105
3106The resulting pixel is computed from the color intensity of the color
3107resulting from summing up the RGB values of surrounding pixels,
3108multiplied by the specified factors, and dividing that sum by the sum
3109of the factors' absolute values.
3110
3111Laplace edge-detection currently uses a matrix of
a933dad1 3112
47e351a3
GM
3113 (1 0 0
3114 0 0 0
3115 9 9 -1)
3116
3117Emboss edge-detection uses a matrix of
3118
3119 ( 2 -1 0
3120 -1 0 1
3121 0 1 -2)
3122
ba9eeda1
GM
3123ALGO `disabled' means transform the image so that it looks
3124``disabled''.
3125
47e351a3
GM
3126`:mask MASK'
3127
3128If MASK is `heuristic' or `(heuristic BG)', build a clipping mask for
3129the image, so that the background of a frame is visible behind the
3130image. If BG is not specified, or if BG is t, determine the
3131background color of the image by looking at the 4 corners of the
3132image, assuming the most frequently occuring color from the corners is
3133the background color of the image. Otherwise, BG must be a list `(RED
3134GREEN BLUE)' specifying the color to assume for the background of the
3135image.
a933dad1 3136
47e351a3
GM
3137If MASK is nil, remove a mask from the image, if it has one. Images
3138in some formats include a mask which can be removed by specifying
3139`:mask nil'.
a933dad1
DL
3140
3141`:file FILE'
3142
3143Load image from FILE. If FILE is not absolute after expanding it,
3144search for the image in `data-directory'. Some image types support
3145building images from data. When this is done, no `:file' property
3146may be present in the image specification.
3147
518df5c4
GM
3148`:data DATA'
3149
3150Get image data from DATA. (As of this writing, this is not yet
3151supported for image type `postscript'). Either :file or :data may be
3152present in an image specification, but not both. All image types
3153support strings as DATA, some types allow additional types of DATA.
3154
a933dad1
DL
3155*** Supported image types
3156
b246b1f6 3157**** XBM, image type `xbm'.
a933dad1
DL
3158
3159XBM images don't require an external library. Additional image
3160properties supported are
3161
3162`:foreground FG'
3163
3164FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default
3165is the frame's foreground.
3166
3167`:background FG'
3168
3169BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default is
3170the frame's background color.
3171
3172XBM images can be constructed from data instead of file. In this
3173case, the image specification must contain the following properties
3174instead of a `:file' property.
3175
3176`:width WIDTH'
3177
3178WIDTH specifies the width of the image in pixels.
3179
3180`:height HEIGHT'
3181
3182HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pixels.
3183
3184`:data DATA'
3185
3186DATA must be either
3187
3188 1. a string large enough to hold the bitmap data, i.e. it must
3189 have a size >= (WIDTH + 7) / 8 * HEIGHT
3190
3191 2. a bool-vector of size >= WIDTH * HEIGHT
3192
3193 3. a vector of strings or bool-vectors, one for each line of the
3194 bitmap.
3195
c76e04a8
GM
3196 4. a string that's an in-memory XBM file. Neither width nor
3197 height may be specified in this case because these are defined
3198 in the file.
3199
a933dad1
DL
3200**** XPM, image type `xpm'
3201
3202XPM images require the external library `libXpm', package
3203`xpm-3.4k.tar.gz', version 3.4k or later. Make sure the library is
3204found when Emacs is configured by supplying appropriate paths via
3205`--x-includes' and `--x-libraries'.
3206
3207Additional image properties supported are:
3208
3209`:color-symbols SYMBOLS'
3210
3211SYMBOLS must be a list of pairs (NAME . COLOR), with NAME being the
3212name of color as it appears in an XPM file, and COLOR being an X color
3213name.
3214
3215XPM images can be built from memory instead of files. In that case,
3216add a `:data' property instead of a `:file' property.
3217
a933dad1
DL
3218The XPM library uses libz in its implementation so that it is able
3219to display compressed images.
3220
3221**** PBM, image type `pbm'
3222
3223PBM images don't require an external library. Color, gray-scale and
3224mono images are supported. There are no additional image properties
3225defined.
3226
3227**** JPEG, image type `jpeg'
3228
3229Support for JPEG images requires the external library `libjpeg',
3bd37feb
GM
3230package `jpegsrc.v6a.tar.gz', or later. Additional image properties
3231are:
3232
a933dad1
DL
3233**** TIFF, image type `tiff'
3234
3235Support for TIFF images requires the external library `libtiff',
3236package `tiff-v3.4-tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
3237properties defined.
3238
3239**** GIF, image type `gif'
3240
3241Support for GIF images requires the external library `libungif', package
3242`libungif-4.1.0', or later.
3243
3244Additional image properties supported are:
3245
3246`:index INDEX'
3247
3248INDEX must be an integer >= 0. Load image number INDEX from a
3249multi-image GIF file. An error is signalled if INDEX is too large.
3250
3251This could be used to implement limited support for animated GIFs.
3252For example, the following function displays a multi-image GIF file
3253at point-min in the current buffer, switching between sub-images
3254every 0.1 seconds.
3255
3256(defun show-anim (file max)
3257 "Display multi-image GIF file FILE which contains MAX subimages."
3258 (display-anim (current-buffer) file 0 max t))
3259
3260(defun display-anim (buffer file idx max first-time)
3261 (when (= idx max)
3262 (setq idx 0))
518df5c4 3263 (let ((img (create-image file nil nil :index idx)))
a933dad1
DL
3264 (save-excursion
3265 (set-buffer buffer)
3266 (goto-char (point-min))
3267 (unless first-time (delete-char 1))
3268 (insert-image img "x"))
3269 (run-with-timer 0.1 nil 'display-anim buffer file (1+ idx) max nil)))
3270
3271**** PNG, image type `png'
3272
3273Support for PNG images requires the external library `libpng',
3274package `libpng-1.0.2.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
3275properties defined.
3276
3277**** Ghostscript, image type `postscript'.
3278
3279Additional image properties supported are:
3280
3281`:pt-width WIDTH'
3282
3283WIDTH is width of the image in pt (1/72 inch). WIDTH must be an
b246b1f6 3284integer. This is a required property.
a933dad1
DL
3285
3286`:pt-height HEIGHT'
3287
3288HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pt (1/72 inch). HEIGHT
b246b1f6 3289must be a integer. This is an required property.
a933dad1
DL
3290
3291`:bounding-box BOX'
3292
3293BOX must be a list or vector of 4 integers giving the bounding box of
3294the PS image, analogous to the `BoundingBox' comment found in PS
3295files. This is an required property.
3296
3297Part of the Ghostscript interface is implemented in Lisp. See
3298lisp/gs.el.
3299
3300*** Lisp interface.
3301
79214ddf
FP
3302The variable `image-types' contains a list of those image types
3303which are supported in the current configuration.
a933dad1
DL
3304
3305Images are stored in an image cache and removed from the cache when
3306they haven't been displayed for `image-cache-eviction-delay seconds.
3307The function `clear-image-cache' can be used to clear the image cache
084cec2f
GM
3308manually. Images in the cache are compared with `equal', i.e. all
3309images with `equal' specifications share the same image.
a933dad1
DL
3310
3311*** Simplified image API, image.el
3312
3313The new Lisp package image.el contains functions that simplify image
3314creation and putting images into text. The function `create-image'
3315can be used to create images. The macro `defimage' can be used to
3316define an image based on available image types. The functions
3317`put-image' and `insert-image' can be used to insert an image into a
3318buffer.
3319
3320+++
3321** Display margins.
3322
3323Windows can now have margins which are used for special text
3324and images.
3325
3326To give a window margins, either set the buffer-local variables
3327`left-margin-width' and `right-margin-width', or call
3328`set-window-margins'. The function `window-margins' can be used to
3329obtain the current settings. To make `left-margin-width' and
3330`right-margin-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying
3331the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update
3332of the display margins.
3333
3334You can put text in margins by giving it a `display' text property
3335containing a pair of the form `(LOCATION . VALUE)', where LOCATION is
3336one of `left-margin' or `right-margin' or nil. VALUE can be either a
3337string, an image specification or a stretch specification (see later
3338in this file).
3339
3340+++
3341** Help display
3342
3343Emacs displays short help messages in the echo area, when the mouse
3344moves over a tool-bar item or a piece of text that has a text property
3345`help-echo'. This feature also applies to strings in the mode line
3346that have a `help-echo' property.
3347
9662da0b 3348If the value of the `help-echo' property is a function, that function
85a8aca9 3349is called with three arguments WINDOW, OBJECT and POSITION. WINDOW is
c20aeb83
GM
3350the window in which the help was found.
3351
3352If OBJECT is a buffer, POS is the position in the buffer where the
3353`help-echo' text property was found.
3354
3355If OBJECT is an overlay, that overlay has a `help-echo' property, and
3356POS is the position in the overlay's buffer under the mouse.
3357
3358If OBJECT is a string (an overlay string or a string displayed with
5ed8d5af 3359the `display' property), POS is the position in that string under the
c20aeb83 3360mouse.
d5aa31d8 3361
9662da0b
GM
3362If the value of the `help-echo' property is neither a function nor a
3363string, it is evaluated to obtain a help string.
3364
3365For tool-bar and menu-bar items, their key definition is used to
3366determine the help to display. If their definition contains a
3367property `:help FORM', FORM is evaluated to determine the help string.
3368For tool-bar items without a help form, the caption of the item is
3369used as help string.
a933dad1
DL
3370
3371The hook `show-help-function' can be set to a function that displays
f0298744
DL
3372the help string differently. For example, enabling a tooltip window
3373causes the help display to appear there instead of in the echo area.
a933dad1
DL
3374
3375+++
3376** Vertical fractional scrolling.
3377
3378The display of text in windows can be scrolled smoothly in pixels.
3379This is useful, for example, for making parts of large images visible.
3380
3381The function `window-vscroll' returns the current value of vertical
3382scrolling, a non-negative fraction of the canonical character height.
3383The function `set-window-vscroll' can be used to set the vertical
3384scrolling value. Here is an example of how these function might be
3385used.
3386
79214ddf
FP
3387 (global-set-key [A-down]
3388 #'(lambda ()
a933dad1 3389 (interactive)
79214ddf 3390 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1 3391 (+ 0.5 (window-vscroll)))))
79214ddf 3392 (global-set-key [A-up]
a933dad1
DL
3393 #'(lambda ()
3394 (interactive)
79214ddf 3395 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1
DL
3396 (- (window-vscroll) 0.5)))))
3397
3398+++
3399** New hook `fontification-functions'.
3400
3401Functions from `fontification-functions' are called from redisplay
3402when it encounters a region of text that is not yet fontified. This
3403variable automatically becomes buffer-local when set. Each function
3404is called with one argument, POS.
3405
3406At least one of the hook functions should fontify one or more
3407characters starting at POS in the current buffer. It should mark them
3408as fontified by giving them a non-nil value of the `fontified' text
3409property. It may be reasonable for these functions to check for the
3410`fontified' property and not put it back on, but they do not have to.
3411
3412+++
3413** Tool bar support.
3414
3415Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. The frame
3416parameter `tool-bar-lines' (X resource "toolBar", class "ToolBar")
3417controls how may lines to reserve for the tool bar. A zero value
3418suppresses the tool bar. If the value is non-zero and
3419`auto-resize-tool-bars' is non-nil the tool bar's size will be changed
3420automatically so that all tool bar items are visible.
3421
3422*** Tool bar item definitions
3423
3424Tool bar items are defined using `define-key' with a prefix-key
3425`tool-bar'. For example `(define-key global-map [tool-bar item1] ITEM)'
3426where ITEM is a list `(menu-item CAPTION BINDING PROPS...)'.
79214ddf 3427
a933dad1
DL
3428CAPTION is the caption of the item, If it's not a string, it is
3429evaluated to get a string. The caption is currently not displayed in
3430the tool bar, but it is displayed if the item doesn't have a `:help'
3431property (see below).
79214ddf 3432
a933dad1
DL
3433BINDING is the tool bar item's binding. Tool bar items with keymaps as
3434binding are currently ignored.
3435
3436The following properties are recognized:
3437
3438`:enable FORM'.
79214ddf 3439
a933dad1
DL
3440FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is enabled
3441or disabled.
79214ddf 3442
a933dad1 3443`:visible FORM'
79214ddf 3444
a933dad1 3445FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is displayed.
79214ddf 3446
a933dad1
DL
3447`:filter FUNCTION'
3448
3449FUNCTION is called with one parameter, the same list BINDING in which
3450FUNCTION is specified as the filter. The value FUNCTION returns is
3451used instead of BINDING to display this item.
79214ddf 3452
a933dad1
DL
3453`:button (TYPE SELECTED)'
3454
3455TYPE must be one of `:radio' or `:toggle'. SELECTED is evaluated
3456and specifies whether the button is selected (pressed) or not.
79214ddf 3457
a933dad1
DL
3458`:image IMAGES'
3459
3460IMAGES is either a single image specification or a vector of four
3461image specifications. If it is a vector, this table lists the
3462meaning of each of the four elements:
3463
3464 Index Use when item is
3465 ----------------------------------------
3466 0 enabled and selected
3467 1 enabled and deselected
3468 2 disabled and selected
3469 3 disabled and deselected
79214ddf 3470
4ba7246d
GM
3471If IMAGE is a single image specification, a Laplace edge-detection
3472algorithm is used on that image to draw the image in disabled state.
3473
a933dad1 3474`:help HELP-STRING'.
79214ddf 3475
a933dad1
DL
3476Gives a help string to display for the tool bar item. This help
3477is displayed when the mouse is moved over the item.
3478
dab96841 3479The function `toolbar-add-item' is a convenience function for adding
d1e68bce
DL
3480toolbar items generally, and `tool-bar-add-item-from-menu' can be used
3481to define a toolbar item with a binding copied from an item on the
3482menu bar.
dab96841 3483
a933dad1
DL
3484*** Tool-bar-related variables.
3485
3486If `auto-resize-tool-bar' is non-nil, the tool bar will automatically
3487resize to show all defined tool bar items. It will never grow larger
3488than 1/4 of the frame's size.
3489
79214ddf 3490If `auto-raise-tool-bar-buttons' is non-nil, tool bar buttons will be
a933dad1
DL
3491raised when the mouse moves over them.
3492
3493You can add extra space between tool bar items by setting
3494`tool-bar-button-margin' to a positive integer specifying a number of
3495pixels. Default is 1.
3496
3497You can change the shadow thickness of tool bar buttons by setting
3498`tool-bar-button-relief' to an integer. Default is 3.
3499
3500*** Tool-bar clicks with modifiers.
3501
3502You can bind commands to clicks with control, shift, meta etc. on
79214ddf 3503a tool bar item. If
a933dad1
DL
3504
3505 (define-key global-map [tool-bar shell]
3506 '(menu-item "Shell" shell
3507 :image (image :type xpm :file "shell.xpm")))
3508
3509is the original tool bar item definition, then
3510
3511 (define-key global-map [tool-bar S-shell] 'some-command)
3512
3513makes a binding to run `some-command' for a shifted click on the same
3514item.
3515
3516** Mode line changes.
3517
3518+++
3519*** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
3520
3521The mode line can be made mouse-sensitive by displaying strings there
3522that have a `local-map' text property. There are three ways to display
3523a string with a `local-map' property in the mode line.
3524
35251. The mode line spec contains a variable whose string value has
3526a `local-map' text property.
3527
35282. The mode line spec contains a format specifier (e.g. `%12b'), and
3529that format specifier has a `local-map' property.
3530
35313. The mode line spec contains a list containing `:eval FORM'. FORM
3532is evaluated. If the result is a string, and that string has a
3533`local-map' property.
3534
3535The same mechanism is used to determine the `face' and `help-echo'
3536properties of strings in the mode line. See `bindings.el' for an
3537example.
3538
54522c9f
GM
3539*** If a mode line element has the form `(:eval FORM)', FORM is
3540evaluated and the result is used as mode line element.
3541
a933dad1
DL
3542+++
3543*** You can suppress mode-line display by setting the buffer-local
3544variable mode-line-format to nil.
3545
3546+++
3547*** A headerline can now be displayed at the top of a window.
3548
3549This mode line's contents are controlled by the new variable
3550`header-line-format' and `default-header-line-format' which are
3551completely analogous to `mode-line-format' and
3552`default-mode-line-format'. A value of nil means don't display a top
3553line.
3554
3555The appearance of top mode lines is controlled by the face
3556`header-line'.
3557
3558The function `coordinates-in-window-p' returns `header-line' for a
3559position in the header-line.
3560
3561+++
3562** Text property `display'
3563
3564The `display' text property is used to insert images into text, and
3565also control other aspects of how text displays. The value of the
3566`display' property should be a display specification, as described
3567below, or a list or vector containing display specifications.
3568
3569*** Variable width and height spaces
3570
3571To display a space of fractional width or height, use a display
3572specification of the form `(LOCATION STRECH)'. If LOCATION is
3573`(margin left-margin)', the space is displayed in the left marginal
3574area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in the right
3575marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the space is
3576displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
3577simpler form STRETCH as property value.
3578
3579The stretch specification STRETCH itself is a list of the form `(space
3580PROPS)', where PROPS is a property list which can contain the
3581properties described below.
3582
3583The display of the fractional space replaces the display of the
3584characters having the `display' property.
3585
3586- :width WIDTH
3587
3588Specifies that the space width should be WIDTH times the normal
3589character width. WIDTH can be an integer or floating point number.
3590
3591- :relative-width FACTOR
3592
3593Specifies that the width of the stretch should be computed from the
3594first character in a group of consecutive characters that have the
3595same `display' property. The computation is done by multiplying the
3596width of that character by FACTOR.
3597
3598- :align-to HPOS
3599
3600Specifies that the space should be wide enough to reach HPOS. The
3601value HPOS is measured in units of the normal character width.
3602
3603Exactly one of the above properties should be used.
3604
3605- :height HEIGHT
3606
3607Specifies the height of the space, as HEIGHT, measured in terms of the
3608normal line height.
3609
3610- :relative-height FACTOR
3611
3612The height of the space is computed as the product of the height
3613of the text having the `display' property and FACTOR.
3614
3615- :ascent ASCENT
3616
3617Specifies that ASCENT percent of the height of the stretch should be
3618used for the ascent of the stretch, i.e. for the part above the
3619baseline. The value of ASCENT must be a non-negative number less or
3620equal to 100.
3621
3622You should not use both `:height' and `:relative-height' together.
3623
3624*** Images
3625
3626A display specification for an image has the form `(LOCATION
3627. IMAGE)', where IMAGE is an image specification. The image replaces,
3628in the display, the characters having this display specification in
3629their `display' text property. If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)',
3630the image will be displayed in the left marginal area, if it is
3631`(margin right-margin)' it will be displayed in the right marginal
3632area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the image will be displayed in
3633the text. In the latter case you can also use the simpler form IMAGE
3634as display specification.
3635
3636*** Other display properties
3637
3638- :space-width FACTOR
3639
3640Specifies that space characters in the text having that property
3641should be displayed FACTOR times as wide as normal; FACTOR must be an
3642integer or float.
3643
3644- :height HEIGHT
3645
3646Display text having this property in a font that is smaller or larger.
3647
3648If HEIGHT is a list of the form `(+ N)', where N is an integer, that
3649means to use a font that is N steps larger. If HEIGHT is a list of
3650the form `(- N)', that means to use a font that is N steps smaller. A
3651``step'' is defined by the set of available fonts; each size for which
3652a font is available counts as a step.
3653
3654If HEIGHT is a number, that means to use a font that is HEIGHT times
3655as tall as the frame's default font.
3656
3657If HEIGHT is a symbol, it is called as a function with the current
3658height as argument. The function should return the new height to use.
3659
3660Otherwise, HEIGHT is evaluated to get the new height, with the symbol
3661`height' bound to the current specified font height.
3662
3663- :raise FACTOR
3664
3665FACTOR must be a number, specifying a multiple of the current
3666font's height. If it is positive, that means to display the characters
3667raised. If it is negative, that means to display them lower down. The
3668amount of raising or lowering is computed without taking account of the
3669`:height' subproperty.
3670
3671*** Conditional display properties
3672
3673All display specifications can be conditionalized. If a specification
3674has the form `(:when CONDITION . SPEC)', the specification SPEC
3675applies only when CONDITION yields a non-nil value when evaluated.
3676During evaluattion, point is temporarily set to the end position of
3677the text having the `display' property.
3678
3679The normal specification consisting of SPEC only is equivalent to
3680`(:when t SPEC)'.
3681
3682+++
3683** New menu separator types.
3684
3685Emacs now supports more than one menu separator type. Menu items with
3686item names consisting of dashes only (including zero dashes) are
3687treated like before. In addition, the following item names are used
3688to specify other menu separator types.
3689
3690- `--no-line' or `--space', or `--:space', or `--:noLine'
3691
3692No separator lines are drawn, but a small space is inserted where the
3693separator occurs.
3694
3695- `--single-line' or `--:singleLine'
3696
3697A single line in the menu's foreground color.
3698
3699- `--double-line' or `--:doubleLine'
3700
3701A double line in the menu's foreground color.
3702
3703- `--single-dashed-line' or `--:singleDashedLine'
3704
3705A single dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
3706
3707- `--double-dashed-line' or `--:doubleDashedLine'
3708
3709A double dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
3710
3711- `--shadow-etched-in' or `--:shadowEtchedIn'
3712
3713A single line with 3D sunken appearance. This is the the form
3714displayed for item names consisting of dashes only.
3715
3716- `--shadow-etched-out' or `--:shadowEtchedOut'
3717
3718A single line with 3D raised appearance.
3719
3720- `--shadow-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedInDash'
3721
3722A single dashed line with 3D sunken appearance.
3723
3724- `--shadow-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedOutDash'
3725
3726A single dashed line with 3D raise appearance.
3727
3728- `--shadow-double-etched-in' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedIn'
3729
3730Two lines with 3D sunken appearance.
3731
3732- `--shadow-double-etched-out' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOut'
3733
3734Two lines with 3D raised appearance.
3735
3736- `--shadow-double-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedInDash'
3737
3738Two dashed lines with 3D sunken appearance.
3739
3740- `--shadow-double-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOutDash'
3741
3742Two dashed lines with 3D raised appearance.
3743
3744Under LessTif/Motif, the last four separator types are displayed like
3745the corresponding single-line separators.
3746
3747+++
3748** New frame parameters for scroll bar colors.
3749
3750The new frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
3751`scroll-bar-background' can be used to change scroll bar colors.
3752Their value must be either a color name, a string, or nil to specify
3753that scroll bars should use a default color. For toolkit scroll bars,
3754default colors are toolkit specific. For non-toolkit scroll bars, the
3755default background is the background color of the frame, and the
3756default foreground is black.
3757
3758The X resource name of these parameters are `scrollBarForeground'
3759(class ScrollBarForeground) and `scrollBarBackground' (class
3760`ScrollBarBackground').
3761
3762Setting these parameters overrides toolkit specific X resource
3763settings for scroll bar colors.
3764
3765+++
3766** You can set `redisplay-dont-pause' to a non-nil value to prevent
3767display updates from being interrupted when input is pending.
3768
3769---
3770** Changing a window's width may now change its window start if it
3771starts on a continuation line. The new window start is computed based
3772on the window's new width, starting from the start of the continued
3773line as the start of the screen line with the minimum distance from
3774the original window start.
3775
3776---
3777** The variable `hscroll-step' and the functions
3778`hscroll-point-visible' and `hscroll-window-column' have been removed
3779now that proper horizontal scrolling is implemented.
3780
3781+++
3782** Windows can now be made fixed-width and/or fixed-height.
3783
3784A window is fixed-size if its buffer has a buffer-local variable
3785`window-size-fixed' whose value is not nil. A value of `height' makes
3786windows fixed-height, a value of `width' makes them fixed-width, any
3787other non-nil value makes them both fixed-width and fixed-height.
3788
3789The following code makes all windows displaying the current buffer
3790fixed-width and fixed-height.
3791
3792 (set (make-local-variable 'window-size-fixed) t)
3793
3794A call to enlarge-window on a window gives an error if that window is
3795fixed-width and it is tried to change the window's width, or if the
3796window is fixed-height, and it is tried to change its height. To
3797change the size of a fixed-size window, bind `window-size-fixed'
3798temporarily to nil, for example
3799
3800 (let ((window-size-fixed nil))
3801 (enlarge-window 10))
3802
79214ddf 3803Likewise, an attempt to split a fixed-height window vertically,
a933dad1 3804or a fixed-width window horizontally results in a error.
e411ce4b
EZ
3805
3806** The cursor-type frame parameter is now supported on MS-DOS
3807terminals. When Emacs starts, it by default changes the cursor shape
3808to a solid box, as it does on Unix. The `cursor-type' frame parameter
3809overrides this as it does on Unix, except that the bar cursor is
3810horizontal rather than vertical (since the MS-DOS display doesn't
3811support a vertical-bar cursor).
76299050 3812
3787e12e
GM
3813
3814^L
3815* Emacs 20.7 is a bug-fix release with few user-visible changes
3816
3817** It is now possible to use CCL-based coding systems for keyboard
3818input.
3819
3820** ange-ftp now handles FTP security extensions, like Kerberos.
3821
3822** Rmail has been extended to recognize more forms of digest messages.
3823
3824** Now, most coding systems set in keyboard coding system work not
3825only for character input, but also in incremental search. The
3826exceptions are such coding systems that handle 2-byte character sets
3827(e.g euc-kr, euc-jp) and that use ISO's escape sequence
3828(e.g. iso-2022-jp). They are ignored in incremental search.
3829
3830** Support for Macintosh PowerPC-based machines running GNU/Linux has
3831been added.
3832
3833^L
3834* Emacs 20.6 is a bug-fix release with one user-visible change
3835
3836** Support for ARM-based non-RISCiX machines has been added.
3837
3838^L
3839* Emacs 20.5 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
3840
3841** Not new, but not mentioned before:
3842M-w when Transient Mark mode is enabled disables the mark.
3843\f
3844* Changes in Emacs 20.4
3845
3846** Init file may be called .emacs.el.
3847
3848You can now call the Emacs init file `.emacs.el'.
3849Formerly the name had to be `.emacs'. If you use the name
3850`.emacs.el', you can byte-compile the file in the usual way.
3851
3852If both `.emacs' and `.emacs.el' exist, the latter file
3853is the one that is used.
3854
3855** shell-command, and shell-command-on-region, now return
3856the exit code of the command (unless it is asynchronous).
3857Also, you can specify a place to put the error output,
3858separate from the command's regular output.
3859Interactively, the variable shell-command-default-error-buffer
3860says where to put error output; set it to a buffer name.
3861In calls from Lisp, an optional argument ERROR-BUFFER specifies
3862the buffer name.
3863
3864When you specify a non-nil error buffer (or buffer name), any error
3865output is inserted before point in that buffer, with \f\n to separate
3866it from the previous batch of error output. The error buffer is not
3867cleared, so error output from successive commands accumulates there.
3868
3869** Setting the default value of enable-multibyte-characters to nil in
3870the .emacs file, either explicitly using setq-default, or via Custom,
3871is now essentially equivalent to using --unibyte: all buffers
3872created during startup will be made unibyte after loading .emacs.
3873
3874** C-x C-f now handles the wildcards * and ? in file names. For
3875example, typing C-x C-f c*.c RET visits all the files whose names
3876match c*.c. To visit a file whose name contains * or ?, add the
3877quoting sequence /: to the beginning of the file name.
3878
3879** The M-x commands keep-lines, flush-lines and count-matches
3880now have the same feature as occur and query-replace:
3881if the pattern contains any upper case letters, then
3882they never ignore case.
3883
3884** The end-of-line format conversion feature previously mentioned
3885under `* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows' actually
3886applies to all operating systems. Emacs recognizes from the contents
3887of a file what convention it uses to separate lines--newline, CRLF, or
3888just CR--and automatically converts the contents to the normal Emacs
3889convention (using newline to separate lines) for editing. This is a
3890part of the general feature of coding system conversion.
3891
3892If you subsequently save the buffer, Emacs converts the text back to
3893the same format that was used in the file before.
3894
3895You can turn off end-of-line conversion by setting the variable
3896`inhibit-eol-conversion' to non-nil, e.g. with Custom in the MULE group.
3897
3898** The character set property `prefered-coding-system' has been
3899renamed to `preferred-coding-system', for the sake of correct spelling.
3900This is a fairly internal feature, so few programs should be affected.
3901
3902** Mode-line display of end-of-line format is changed.
3903The indication of the end-of-line format of the file visited by a
3904buffer is now more explicit when that format is not the usual one for
3905your operating system. For example, the DOS-style end-of-line format
3906is displayed as "(DOS)" on Unix and GNU/Linux systems. The usual
3907end-of-line format is still displayed as a single character (colon for
3908Unix, backslash for DOS and Windows, and forward slash for the Mac).
3909
3910The values of the variables eol-mnemonic-unix, eol-mnemonic-dos,
3911eol-mnemonic-mac, and eol-mnemonic-undecided, which are strings,
3912control what is displayed in the mode line for each end-of-line
3913format. You can now customize these variables.
3914
3915** In the previous version of Emacs, tar-mode didn't work well if a
3916filename contained non-ASCII characters. Now this is fixed. Such a
3917filename is decoded by file-name-coding-system if the default value of
3918enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil.
3919
3920** The command temp-buffer-resize-mode toggles a minor mode
3921in which temporary buffers (such as help buffers) are given
3922windows just big enough to hold the whole contents.
3923
3924** If you use completion.el, you must now run the function
3925dynamic-completion-mode to enable it. Just loading the file
3926doesn't have any effect.
3927
3928** In Flyspell mode, the default is now to make just one Ispell process,
3929not one per buffer.
3930
3931** If you use iswitchb but do not call (iswitchb-default-keybindings) to
3932use the default keybindings, you will need to add the following line:
3933 (add-hook 'minibuffer-setup-hook 'iswitchb-minibuffer-setup)
3934
3935** Auto-show mode is no longer enabled just by loading auto-show.el.
3936To control it, set `auto-show-mode' via Custom or use the
3937`auto-show-mode' command.
3938
3939** Handling of X fonts' ascent/descent parameters has been changed to
3940avoid redisplay problems. As a consequence, compared with previous
3941versions the line spacing and frame size now differ with some font
3942choices, typically increasing by a pixel per line. This change
3943occurred in version 20.3 but was not documented then.
3944
3945** If you select the bar cursor style, it uses the frame's
3946cursor-color, rather than the cursor foreground pixel.
3947
3948** In multibyte mode, Rmail decodes incoming MIME messages using the
3949character set specified in the message. If you want to disable this
3950feature, set the variable rmail-decode-mime-charset to nil.
3951
3952** Not new, but not mentioned previously in NEWS: when you use #! at
3953the beginning of a file to make it executable and specify an
3954interpreter program, Emacs looks on the second line for the -*- mode
3955and variable specification, as well as on the first line.
3956
3957** Support for IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters.
3958
3959The new command M-x codepage-setup creates a special coding system
3960that can be used to convert text between a specific IBM codepage and
3961one of the character sets built into Emacs which matches that
3962codepage. For example, codepage 850 corresponds to Latin-1 character
3963set, codepage 855 corresponds to Cyrillic-ISO character set, etc.
3964
3965Windows codepages 1250, 1251 and some others, where Windows deviates
3966from the corresponding ISO character set, are also supported.
3967
3968IBM box-drawing characters and other glyphs which don't have
3969equivalents in the corresponding ISO character set, are converted to
3970a character defined by dos-unsupported-char-glyph on MS-DOS, and to
3971`?' on other systems.
3972
3973IBM codepages are widely used on MS-DOS and MS-Windows, so this
3974feature is most useful on those platforms, but it can also be used on
3975Unix.
3976
3977Emacs compiled for MS-DOS automatically loads the support for the
3978current codepage when it starts.
3979
3980** Mail changes
3981
3982*** When mail is sent using compose-mail (C-x m), and if
3983`mail-send-nonascii' is set to the new default value `mime',
3984appropriate MIME headers are added. The headers are added only if
3985non-ASCII characters are present in the body of the mail, and no other
3986MIME headers are already present. For example, the following three
3987headers are added if the coding system used in the *mail* buffer is
3988latin-1:
3989
3990 MIME-version: 1.0
3991 Content-type: text/plain; charset=iso-8859-1
3992 Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit
3993
3994*** The new variable default-sendmail-coding-system specifies the
3995default way to encode outgoing mail. This has higher priority than
3996default-buffer-file-coding-system but has lower priority than
3997sendmail-coding-system and the local value of
3998buffer-file-coding-system.
3999
4000You should not set this variable manually. Instead, set
4001sendmail-coding-system to specify a fixed encoding for all outgoing
4002mail.
4003
4004*** When you try to send a message that contains non-ASCII characters,
4005if the coding system specified by those variables doesn't handle them,
4006Emacs will ask you to select a suitable coding system while showing a
4007list of possible coding systems.
4008
4009** CC Mode changes
4010
4011*** c-default-style can now take an association list that maps major
4012modes to style names. When this variable is an alist, Java mode no
4013longer hardcodes a setting to "java" style. See the variable's
4014docstring for details.
4015
4016*** It's now possible to put a list as the offset on a syntactic
4017symbol. The list is evaluated recursively until a non-nil offset is
4018found. This is useful to combine several lineup functions to act in a
4019prioritized order on a single line. However, none of the supplied
4020lineup functions use this feature currently.
4021
4022*** New syntactic symbol catch-clause, which is used on the "catch" and
4023"finally" lines in try-catch constructs in C++ and Java.
4024
4025*** New cleanup brace-catch-brace on c-cleanup-list, which does for
4026"catch" lines what brace-elseif-brace does for "else if" lines.
4027
4028*** The braces of Java anonymous inner classes are treated separately
4029from the braces of other classes in auto-newline mode. Two new
4030symbols inexpr-class-open and inexpr-class-close may be used on
4031c-hanging-braces-alist to control the automatic newlines used for
4032anonymous classes.
4033
4034*** Support for the Pike language added, along with new Pike specific
4035syntactic symbols: inlambda, lambda-intro-cont
4036
4037*** Support for Java anonymous classes via new syntactic symbol
4038inexpr-class. New syntactic symbol inexpr-statement for Pike
4039support and gcc-style statements inside expressions. New lineup
4040function c-lineup-inexpr-block.
4041
4042*** New syntactic symbol brace-entry-open which is used in brace lists
4043(i.e. static initializers) when a list entry starts with an open
4044brace. These used to be recognized as brace-list-entry's.
4045c-electric-brace also recognizes brace-entry-open braces
4046(brace-list-entry's can no longer be electrified).
4047
4048*** New command c-indent-line-or-region, not bound by default.
4049
4050*** `#' is only electric when typed in the indentation of a line.
4051
4052*** Parentheses are now electric (via the new command c-electric-paren)
4053for auto-reindenting lines when parens are typed.
4054
4055*** In "gnu" style, inline-open offset is now set to zero.
4056
4057*** Uniform handling of the inclass syntactic symbol. The indentation
4058associated with it is now always relative to the class opening brace.
4059This means that the indentation behavior has changed in some
4060circumstances, but only if you've put anything besides 0 on the
4061class-open syntactic symbol (none of the default styles do that).
4062
4063** Gnus changes.
4064
4065*** New functionality for using Gnus as an offline newsreader has been
4066added. A plethora of new commands and modes have been added. See the
4067Gnus manual for the full story.
4068
4069*** The nndraft backend has returned, but works differently than
4070before. All Message buffers are now also articles in the nndraft
4071group, which is created automatically.
4072
4073*** `gnus-alter-header-function' can now be used to alter header
4074values.
4075
4076*** `gnus-summary-goto-article' now accept Message-ID's.
4077
4078*** A new Message command for deleting text in the body of a message
4079outside the region: `C-c C-v'.
4080
4081*** You can now post to component group in nnvirtual groups with
4082`C-u C-c C-c'.
4083
4084*** `nntp-rlogin-program' -- new variable to ease customization.
4085
4086*** `C-u C-c C-c' in `gnus-article-edit-mode' will now inhibit
4087re-highlighting of the article buffer.
4088
4089*** New element in `gnus-boring-article-headers' -- `long-to'.
4090
4091*** `M-i' symbolic prefix command. See the section "Symbolic
4092Prefixes" in the Gnus manual for details.
4093
4094*** `L' and `I' in the summary buffer now take the symbolic prefix
4095`a' to add the score rule to the "all.SCORE" file.
4096
4097*** `gnus-simplify-subject-functions' variable to allow greater
4098control over simplification.
4099
4100*** `A T' -- new command for fetching the current thread.
4101
4102*** `/ T' -- new command for including the current thread in the
4103limit.
4104
4105*** `M-RET' is a new Message command for breaking cited text.
4106
4107*** \\1-expressions are now valid in `nnmail-split-methods'.
4108
4109*** The `custom-face-lookup' function has been removed.
4110If you used this function in your initialization files, you must
4111rewrite them to use `face-spec-set' instead.
4112
4113*** Cancelling now uses the current select method. Symbolic prefix
4114`a' forces normal posting method.
4115
4116*** New command to translate M******** sm*rtq**t*s into proper text
4117-- `W d'.
4118
4119*** For easier debugging of nntp, you can set `nntp-record-commands'
4120to a non-nil value.
4121
4122*** nntp now uses ~/.authinfo, a .netrc-like file, for controlling
4123where and how to send AUTHINFO to NNTP servers.
4124
4125*** A command for editing group parameters from the summary buffer
4126has been added.
4127
4128*** A history of where mails have been split is available.
4129
4130*** A new article date command has been added -- `article-date-iso8601'.
4131
4132*** Subjects can be simplified when threading by setting
4133`gnus-score-thread-simplify'.
4134
4135*** A new function for citing in Message has been added --
4136`message-cite-original-without-signature'.
4137
4138*** `article-strip-all-blank-lines' -- new article command.
4139
4140*** A new Message command to kill to the end of the article has
4141been added.
4142
4143*** A minimum adaptive score can be specified by using the
4144`gnus-adaptive-word-minimum' variable.
4145
4146*** The "lapsed date" article header can be kept continually
4147updated by the `gnus-start-date-timer' command.
4148
4149*** Web listserv archives can be read with the nnlistserv backend.
4150
4151*** Old dejanews archives can now be read by nnweb.
4152
4153*** `gnus-posting-styles' has been re-activated.
4154
4155** Changes to TeX and LaTeX mode
4156
4157*** The new variable `tex-start-options-string' can be used to give
4158options for the TeX run. The default value causes TeX to run in
4159nonstopmode. For an interactive TeX run set it to nil or "".
4160
4161*** The command `tex-feed-input' sends input to the Tex Shell. In a
4162TeX buffer it is bound to the keys C-RET, C-c RET, and C-c C-m (some
4163of these keys may not work on all systems). For instance, if you run
4164TeX interactively and if the TeX run stops because of an error, you
4165can continue it without leaving the TeX buffer by typing C-RET.
4166
4167*** The Tex Shell Buffer is now in `compilation-shell-minor-mode'.
4168All error-parsing commands of the Compilation major mode are available
4169but bound to keys that don't collide with the shell. Thus you can use
4170the Tex Shell for command line executions like a usual shell.
4171
4172*** The commands `tex-validate-region' and `tex-validate-buffer' check
4173the matching of braces and $'s. The errors are listed in a *Occur*
4174buffer and you can use C-c C-c or mouse-2 to go to a particular
4175mismatch.
4176
4177** Changes to RefTeX mode
4178
4179*** The table of contents buffer can now also display labels and
4180file boundaries in addition to sections. Use `l', `i', and `c' keys.
4181
4182*** Labels derived from context (the section heading) are now
4183lowercase by default. To make the label legal in LaTeX, latin-1
4184characters will lose their accent. All Mule characters will be
4185removed from the label.
4186
4187*** The automatic display of cross reference information can also use
4188a window instead of the echo area. See variable `reftex-auto-view-crossref'.
4189
4190*** kpsewhich can be used by RefTeX to find TeX and BibTeX files. See the
4191customization group `reftex-finding-files'.
4192
4193*** The option `reftex-bibfile-ignore-list' has been renamed to
4194`reftex-bibfile-ignore-regexps' and indeed can be fed with regular
4195expressions.
4196
4197*** Multiple Selection buffers are now hidden buffers.
4198
4199** New/deleted modes and packages
4200
4201*** The package snmp-mode.el provides major modes for editing SNMP and
4202SNMPv2 MIBs. It has entries on `auto-mode-alist'.
4203
4204*** The package sql.el provides a major mode, M-x sql-mode, for
4205editing SQL files, and M-x sql-interactive-mode for interacting with
4206SQL interpreters. It has an entry on `auto-mode-alist'.
4207
4208*** M-x highlight-changes-mode provides a minor mode displaying buffer
4209changes with a special face.
4210
4211*** ispell4.el has been deleted. It got in the way of ispell.el and
4212this was hard to fix reliably. It has long been obsolete -- use
4213Ispell 3.1 and ispell.el.
4214\f
4215* MS-DOS changes in Emacs 20.4
4216
4217** Emacs compiled for MS-DOS now supports MULE features better.
4218This includes support for display of all ISO 8859-N character sets,
4219conversion to and from IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters,
4220and automatic setup of the MULE environment at startup. For details,
4221check out the section `MS-DOS and MULE' in the manual.
4222
4223The MS-DOS installation procedure automatically configures and builds
4224Emacs with input method support if it finds an unpacked Leim
4225distribution when the config.bat script is run.
4226
4227** Formerly, the value of lpr-command did not affect printing on
4228MS-DOS unless print-region-function was set to nil, but now it
4229controls whether an external program is invoked or output is written
4230directly to a printer port. Similarly, in the previous version of
4231Emacs, the value of ps-lpr-command did not affect PostScript printing
4232on MS-DOS unless ps-printer-name was set to something other than a
4233string (eg. t or `pipe'), but now it controls whether an external
4234program is used. (These changes were made so that configuration of
4235printing variables would be almost identical across all platforms.)
4236
4237** In the previous version of Emacs, PostScript and non-PostScript
4238output was piped to external programs, but because most print programs
4239available for MS-DOS and MS-Windows cannot read data from their standard
4240input, on those systems the data to be output is now written to a
4241temporary file whose name is passed as the last argument to the external
4242program.
4243
4244An exception is made for `print', a standard program on Windows NT,
4245and `nprint', a standard program on Novell Netware. For both of these
4246programs, the command line is constructed in the appropriate syntax
4247automatically, using only the value of printer-name or ps-printer-name
4248as appropriate--the value of the relevant `-switches' variable is
4249ignored, as both programs have no useful switches.
4250
4251** The value of the variable dos-printer (cf. dos-ps-printer), if it has
4252a value, overrides the value of printer-name (cf. ps-printer-name), on
4253MS-DOS and MS-Windows only. This has been true since version 20.3, but
4254was not documented clearly before.
4255
4256** All the Emacs games now work on MS-DOS terminals.
4257This includes Tetris and Snake.
4258\f
4259* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.4
4260
4261** New functions line-beginning-position and line-end-position
4262return the position of the beginning or end of the current line.
4263They both accept an optional argument, which has the same
4264meaning as the argument to beginning-of-line or end-of-line.
4265
4266** find-file and allied functions now have an optional argument
4267WILDCARD. If this is non-nil, they do wildcard processing,
4268and visit all files that match the wildcard pattern.
4269
4270** Changes in the file-attributes function.
4271
4272*** The file size returned by file-attributes may be an integer or a float.
4273It is an integer if the size fits in a Lisp integer, float otherwise.
4274
4275*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
4276the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a cons cell containing two
4277integers.
4278
4279** The new function directory-files-and-attributes returns a list of
4280files in a directory and their attributes. It accepts the same
4281arguments as directory-files and has similar semantics, except that
4282file names and attributes are returned.
4283
4284** The new function file-attributes-lessp is a helper function for
4285sorting the list generated by directory-files-and-attributes. It
4286accepts two arguments, each a list of a file name and its atttributes.
4287It compares the file names of each according to string-lessp and
4288returns the result.
4289
4290** The new function file-expand-wildcards expands a wildcard-pattern
4291to produce a list of existing files that match the pattern.
4292
4293** New functions for base64 conversion:
4294
4295The function base64-encode-region converts a part of the buffer
4296into the base64 code used in MIME. base64-decode-region
4297performs the opposite conversion. Line-breaking is supported
4298optionally.
4299
4300Functions base64-encode-string and base64-decode-string do a similar
4301job on the text in a string. They return the value as a new string.
4302
4303**
4304The new function process-running-child-p
4305will tell you if a subprocess has given control of its
4306terminal to its own child process.
4307
4308** interrupt-process and such functions have a new feature:
4309when the second argument is `lambda', they send a signal
4310to the running child of the subshell, if any, but if the shell
4311itself owns its terminal, no signal is sent.
4312
4313** There are new widget types `plist' and `alist' which can
4314be used for customizing variables whose values are plists or alists.
4315
4316** easymenu.el Now understands `:key-sequence' and `:style button'.
4317:included is an alias for :visible.
4318
4319easy-menu-add-item now understands the values returned by
4320easy-menu-remove-item and easy-menu-item-present-p. This can be used
4321to move or copy menu entries.
4322
4323** Multibyte editing changes
4324
4325*** The definitions of sref and char-bytes are changed. Now, sref is
4326an alias of aref and char-bytes always returns 1. This change is to
4327make some Emacs Lisp code which works on 20.2 and earlier also
4328work on the latest Emacs. Such code uses a combination of sref and
4329char-bytes in a loop typically as below:
4330 (setq char (sref str idx)
4331 idx (+ idx (char-bytes idx)))
4332The byte-compiler now warns that this is obsolete.
4333
4334If you want to know how many bytes a specific multibyte character
4335(say, CH) occupies in a multibyte buffer, use this code:
4336 (charset-bytes (char-charset ch))
4337
4338*** In multibyte mode, when you narrow a buffer to some region, and the
4339region is preceded or followed by non-ASCII codes, inserting or
4340deleting at the head or the end of the region may signal this error:
4341
4342 Byte combining across boundary of accessible buffer text inhibitted
4343
4344This is to avoid some bytes being combined together into a character
4345across the boundary.
4346
4347*** The functions find-charset-region and find-charset-string include
4348`unknown' in the returned list in the following cases:
4349 o The current buffer or the target string is unibyte and
4350 contains 8-bit characters.
4351 o The current buffer or the target string is multibyte and
4352 contains invalid characters.
4353
4354*** The functions decode-coding-region and encode-coding-region remove
4355text properties of the target region. Ideally, they should correctly
4356preserve text properties, but for the moment, it's hard. Removing
4357text properties is better than preserving them in a less-than-correct
4358way.
4359
4360*** prefer-coding-system sets EOL conversion of default coding systems.
4361If the argument to prefer-coding-system specifies a certain type of
4362end of line conversion, the default coding systems set by
4363prefer-coding-system will specify that conversion type for end of line.
4364
4365*** The new function thai-compose-string can be used to properly
4366compose Thai characters in a string.
4367
4368** The primitive `define-prefix-command' now takes an optional third
4369argument NAME, which should be a string. It supplies the menu name
4370for the created keymap. Keymaps created in order to be displayed as
4371menus should always use the third argument.
4372
4373** The meanings of optional second arguments for read-char,
4374read-event, and read-char-exclusive are flipped. Now the second
4375arguments are INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. These functions use the current
4376input method (if any) if and only if INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD is non-nil.
4377
4378** The new function clear-this-command-keys empties out the contents
4379of the vector that (this-command-keys) returns. This is useful in
4380programs that read passwords, to prevent the passwords from echoing
4381inadvertently as part of the next command in certain cases.
4382
4383** The new macro `with-temp-message' displays a temporary message in
4384the echo area, while executing some Lisp code. Like `progn', it
4385returns the value of the last form, but it also restores the previous
4386echo area contents.
4387
4388 (with-temp-message MESSAGE &rest BODY)
4389
4390** The function `require' now takes an optional third argument
4391NOERROR. If it is non-nil, then there is no error if the
4392requested feature cannot be loaded.
4393
4394** In the function modify-face, an argument of (nil) for the
4395foreground color, background color or stipple pattern
4396means to clear out that attribute.
4397
4398** The `outer-window-id' frame property of an X frame
4399gives the window number of the outermost X window for the frame.
4400
4401** Temporary buffers made with with-output-to-temp-buffer are now
4402read-only by default, and normally use the major mode Help mode
4403unless you put them in some other non-Fundamental mode before the
4404end of with-output-to-temp-buffer.
4405
4406** The new functions gap-position and gap-size return information on
4407the gap of the current buffer.
4408
4409** The new functions position-bytes and byte-to-position provide a way
4410to convert between character positions and byte positions in the
4411current buffer.
4412
4413** vc.el defines two new macros, `edit-vc-file' and `with-vc-file', to
4414facilitate working with version-controlled files from Lisp programs.
4415These macros check out a given file automatically if needed, and check
4416it back in after any modifications have been made.
4417\f
4418* Installation Changes in Emacs 20.3
4419
4420** The default value of load-path now includes most subdirectories of
4421the site-specific directories /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp and
4422/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp, in addition to those
4423directories themselves. Both immediate subdirectories and
4424subdirectories multiple levels down are added to load-path.
4425
4426Not all subdirectories are included, though. Subdirectories whose
4427names do not start with a letter or digit are excluded.
4428Subdirectories named RCS or CVS are excluded. Also, a subdirectory
4429which contains a file named `.nosearch' is excluded. You can use
4430these methods to prevent certain subdirectories from being searched.
4431
4432Emacs finds these subdirectories and adds them to load-path when it
4433starts up. While it would be cleaner to find the subdirectories each
4434time Emacs loads a file, that would be much slower.
4435
4436This feature is an incompatible change. If you have stored some Emacs
4437Lisp files in a subdirectory of the site-lisp directory specifically
4438to prevent them from being used, you will need to rename the
4439subdirectory to start with a non-alphanumeric character, or create a
4440`.nosearch' file in it, in order to continue to achieve the desired
4441results.
4442
4443** Emacs no longer includes an old version of the C preprocessor from
4444GCC. This was formerly used to help compile Emacs with C compilers
4445that had limits on the significant length of an identifier, but in
4446fact we stopped supporting such compilers some time ago.
4447\f
4448* Changes in Emacs 20.3
4449
4450** The new command C-x z (repeat) repeats the previous command
4451including its argument. If you repeat the z afterward,
4452it repeats the command additional times; thus, you can
4453perform many repetitions with one keystroke per repetition.
4454
4455** Emacs now supports "selective undo" which undoes only within a
4456specified region. To do this, set point and mark around the desired
4457region and type C-u C-x u (or C-u C-_). You can then continue undoing
4458further, within the same region, by repeating the ordinary undo
4459command C-x u or C-_. This will keep undoing changes that were made
4460within the region you originally specified, until either all of them
4461are undone, or it encounters a change which crosses the edge of that
4462region.
4463
4464In Transient Mark mode, undoing when a region is active requests
4465selective undo.
4466
4467** If you specify --unibyte when starting Emacs, then all buffers are
4468unibyte, except when a Lisp program specifically creates a multibyte
4469buffer. Setting the environment variable EMACS_UNIBYTE has the same
4470effect. The --no-unibyte option overrides EMACS_UNIBYTE and directs
4471Emacs to run normally in multibyte mode.
4472
4473The option --unibyte does not affect the reading of Emacs Lisp files,
4474though. If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, use
4475-*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. That will force Emacs to
4476load that file in unibyte mode, regardless of how Emacs was started.
4477
4478** toggle-enable-multibyte-characters no longer has a key binding and
4479no longer appears in the menu bar. We've realized that changing the
4480enable-multibyte-characters variable in an existing buffer is
4481something that most users not do.
4482
4483** You can specify a coding system to use for the next cut or paste
4484operations through the window system with the command C-x RET X.
4485The coding system can make a difference for communication with other
4486applications.
4487
4488C-x RET x specifies a coding system for all subsequent cutting and
4489pasting operations.
4490
4491** You can specify the printer to use for commands that do printing by
4492setting the variable `printer-name'. Just what a printer name looks
4493like depends on your operating system. You can specify a different
4494printer for the Postscript printing commands by setting
4495`ps-printer-name'.
4496
4497** Emacs now supports on-the-fly spell checking by the means of a
4498minor mode. It is called M-x flyspell-mode. You don't have to remember
4499any other special commands to use it, and you will hardly notice it
4500except when you make a spelling error. Flyspell works by highlighting
4501incorrect words as soon as they are completed or as soon as the cursor
4502hits a new word.
4503
4504Flyspell mode works with whichever dictionary you have selected for
4505Ispell in Emacs. In TeX mode, it understands TeX syntax so as not
4506to be confused by TeX commands.
4507
4508You can correct a misspelled word by editing it into something
4509correct. You can also correct it, or accept it as correct, by
4510clicking on the word with Mouse-2; that gives you a pop-up menu
4511of various alternative replacements and actions.
4512
4513Flyspell mode also proposes "automatic" corrections. M-TAB replaces
4514the current misspelled word with a possible correction. If several
4515corrections are made possible, M-TAB cycles through them in
4516alphabetical order, or in order of decreasing likelihood if
4517flyspell-sort-corrections is nil.
4518
4519Flyspell mode also flags an error when a word is repeated, if
4520flyspell-mark-duplications-flag is non-nil.
4521
4522** Changes in input method usage.
4523
4524Now you can use arrow keys (right, left, down, up) for selecting among
4525the alternatives just the same way as you do by C-f, C-b, C-n, and C-p
4526respectively.
4527
4528You can use the ENTER key to accept the current conversion.
4529
4530If you type TAB to display a list of alternatives, you can select one
4531of the alternatives with Mouse-2.
4532
4533The meaning of the variable `input-method-verbose-flag' is changed so
4534that you can set it to t, nil, `default', or `complex-only'.
4535
4536 If the value is nil, extra guidance is never given.
4537
4538 If the value is t, extra guidance is always given.
4539
4540 If the value is `complex-only', extra guidance is always given only
4541 when you are using complex input methods such as chinese-py.
4542
4543 If the value is `default' (this is the default), extra guidance is
4544 given in the following case:
4545 o When you are using a complex input method.
4546 o When you are using a simple input method but not in the minibuffer.
4547
4548If you are using Emacs through a very slow line, setting
4549input-method-verbose-flag to nil or to complex-only is a good choice,
4550and if you are using an input method you are not familiar with,
4551setting it to t is helpful.
4552
4553The old command select-input-method is now called set-input-method.
4554
4555In the language environment "Korean", you can use the following
4556keys:
4557 Shift-SPC toggle-korean-input-method
4558 C-F9 quail-hangul-switch-symbol-ksc
4559 F9 quail-hangul-switch-hanja
4560These key bindings are canceled when you switch to another language
4561environment.
4562
4563** The minibuffer history of file names now records the specified file
4564names, not the entire minibuffer input. For example, if the
4565minibuffer starts out with /usr/foo/, you might type in /etc/passwd to
4566get
4567
4568 /usr/foo//etc/passwd
4569
4570which stands for the file /etc/passwd.
4571
4572Formerly, this used to put /usr/foo//etc/passwd in the history list.
4573Now this puts just /etc/passwd in the history list.
4574
4575** If you are root, Emacs sets backup-by-copying-when-mismatch to t
4576at startup, so that saving a file will be sure to preserve
4577its owner and group.
4578
4579** find-func.el can now also find the place of definition of Emacs
4580Lisp variables in user-loaded libraries.
4581
4582** C-x r t (string-rectangle) now deletes the existing rectangle
4583contents before inserting the specified string on each line.
4584
4585** There is a new command delete-whitespace-rectangle
4586which deletes whitespace starting from a particular column
4587in all the lines on a rectangle. The column is specified
4588by the left edge of the rectangle.
4589
4590** You can now store a number into a register with C-u NUMBER C-x r n REG,
4591increment it by INC with C-u INC C-x r + REG (to increment by one, omit
4592C-u INC), and insert it in the buffer with C-x r g REG. This is useful
4593for writing keyboard macros.
4594
4595** The new command M-x speedbar displays a frame in which directories,
4596files, and tags can be displayed, manipulated, and jumped to. The
4597frame defaults to 20 characters in width, and is the same height as
4598the frame that it was started from. Some major modes define
4599additional commands for the speedbar, including Rmail, GUD/GDB, and
4600info.
4601
4602** query-replace-regexp is now bound to C-M-%.
4603
4604** In Transient Mark mode, when the region is active, M-x
4605query-replace and the other replace commands now operate on the region
4606contents only.
4607
4608** M-x write-region, when used interactively, now asks for
4609confirmation before overwriting an existing file. When you call
4610the function from a Lisp program, a new optional argument CONFIRM
4611says whether to ask for confirmation in this case.
4612
4613** If you use find-file-literally and the file is already visited
4614non-literally, the command asks you whether to revisit the file
4615literally. If you say no, it signals an error.
4616
4617** Major modes defined with the "derived mode" feature
4618now use the proper name for the mode hook: WHATEVER-mode-hook.
4619Formerly they used the name WHATEVER-mode-hooks, but that is
4620inconsistent with Emacs conventions.
4621
4622** shell-command-on-region (and shell-command) reports success or
4623failure if the command produces no output.
4624
4625** Set focus-follows-mouse to nil if your window system or window
4626manager does not transfer focus to another window when you just move
4627the mouse.
4628
4629** mouse-menu-buffer-maxlen has been renamed to
4630mouse-buffer-menu-maxlen to be consistent with the other related
4631function and variable names.
4632
4633** The new variable auto-coding-alist specifies coding systems for
4634reading specific files. This has higher priority than
4635file-coding-system-alist.
4636
4637** If you set the variable unibyte-display-via-language-environment to
4638t, then Emacs displays non-ASCII characters are displayed by
4639converting them to the equivalent multibyte characters according to
4640the current language environment. As a result, they are displayed
4641according to the current fontset.
4642
4643** C-q's handling of codes in the range 0200 through 0377 is changed.
4644
4645The codes in the range 0200 through 0237 are inserted as one byte of
4646that code regardless of the values of nonascii-translation-table and
4647nonascii-insert-offset.
4648
4649For the codes in the range 0240 through 0377, if
4650enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil and nonascii-translation-table
4651nor nonascii-insert-offset can't convert them to valid multibyte
4652characters, they are converted to Latin-1 characters.
4653
4654** If you try to find a file that is not read-accessible, you now get
4655an error, rather than an empty buffer and a warning.
4656
4657** In the minibuffer history commands M-r and M-s, an upper case
4658letter in the regular expression forces case-sensitive search.
4659
4660** In the *Help* buffer, cross-references to commands and variables
4661are inferred and hyperlinked. Use C-h m in Help mode for the relevant
4662command keys.
4663
4664** M-x apropos-command, with a prefix argument, no longer looks for
4665user option variables--instead it looks for noninteractive functions.
4666
4667Meanwhile, the command apropos-variable normally searches for
4668user option variables; with a prefix argument, it looks at
4669all variables that have documentation.
4670
4671** When you type a long line in the minibuffer, and the minibuffer
4672shows just one line, automatically scrolling works in a special way
4673that shows you overlap with the previous line of text. The variable
4674minibuffer-scroll-overlap controls how many characters of overlap
4675it should show; the default is 20.
4676
4677Meanwhile, Resize Minibuffer mode is still available; in that mode,
4678the minibuffer grows taller (up to a point) as needed to show the whole
4679of your input.
4680
4681** The new command M-x customize-changed-options lets you customize
4682all the options whose meanings or default values have changed in
4683recent Emacs versions. You specify a previous Emacs version number as
4684argument, and the command creates a customization buffer showing all
4685the customizable options which were changed since that version.
4686Newly added options are included as well.
4687
4688If you don't specify a particular version number argument,
4689then the customization buffer shows all the customizable options
4690for which Emacs versions of changes are recorded.
4691
4692This function is also bound to the Changed Options entry in the
4693Customize menu.
4694
4695** When you run M-x grep with a prefix argument, it figures out
4696the tag around point and puts that into the default grep command.
4697
4698** The new command M-* (pop-tag-mark) pops back through a history of
4699buffer positions from which M-. or other tag-finding commands were
4700invoked.
4701
4702** The new variable comment-padding specifies the number of spaces
4703that `comment-region' will insert before the actual text of the comment.
4704The default is 1.
4705
4706** In Fortran mode the characters `.', `_' and `$' now have symbol
4707syntax, not word syntax. Fortran mode now supports `imenu' and has
4708new commands fortran-join-line (M-^) and fortran-narrow-to-subprogram
4709(C-x n d). M-q can be used to fill a statement or comment block
4710sensibly.
4711
4712** GUD now supports jdb, the Java debugger, and pdb, the Python debugger.
4713
4714** If you set the variable add-log-keep-changes-together to a non-nil
4715value, the command `C-x 4 a' will automatically notice when you make
4716two entries in one day for one file, and combine them.
4717
4718** You can use the command M-x diary-mail-entries to mail yourself a
4719reminder about upcoming diary entries. See the documentation string
4720for a sample shell script for calling this function automatically
4721every night.
4722
4723** Desktop changes
4724
4725*** All you need to do to enable use of the Desktop package, is to set
4726the variable desktop-enable to t with Custom.
4727
4728*** Minor modes are now restored. Which minor modes are restored
4729and how modes are restored is controlled by `desktop-minor-mode-table'.
4730
4731** There is no need to do anything special, now, to enable Gnus to
4732read and post multi-lingual articles.
4733
4734** Outline mode has now support for showing hidden outlines when
4735doing an isearch. In order for this to happen search-invisible should
4736be set to open (the default). If an isearch match is inside a hidden
4737outline the outline is made visible. If you continue pressing C-s and
4738the match moves outside the formerly invisible outline, the outline is
4739made invisible again.
4740
4741** Mail reading and sending changes
4742
4743*** The Rmail e command now switches to displaying the whole header of
4744the message before it lets you edit the message. This is so that any
4745changes you make in the header will not be lost if you subsequently
4746toggle.
4747
4748*** The w command in Rmail, which writes the message body into a file,
4749now works in the summary buffer as well. (The command to delete the
4750summary buffer is now Q.) The default file name for the w command, if
4751the message has no subject, is stored in the variable
4752rmail-default-body-file.
4753
4754*** Most of the commands and modes that operate on mail and netnews no
4755longer depend on the value of mail-header-separator. Instead, they
4756handle whatever separator the buffer happens to use.
4757
4758*** If you set mail-signature to a value which is not t, nil, or a string,
4759it should be an expression. When you send a message, this expression
4760is evaluated to insert the signature.
4761
4762*** The new Lisp library feedmail.el (version 8) enhances processing of
4763outbound email messages. It works in coordination with other email
4764handling packages (e.g., rmail, VM, gnus) and is responsible for
4765putting final touches on messages and actually submitting them for
4766transmission. Users of the emacs program "fakemail" might be
4767especially interested in trying feedmail.
4768
4769feedmail is not enabled by default. See comments at the top of
4770feedmail.el for set-up instructions. Among the bigger features
4771provided by feedmail are:
4772
4773**** you can park outgoing messages into a disk-based queue and
4774stimulate sending some or all of them later (handy for laptop users);
4775there is also a queue for draft messages
4776
4777**** you can get one last look at the prepped outbound message and
4778be prompted for confirmation
4779
4780**** does smart filling of address headers
4781
4782**** can generate a MESSAGE-ID: line and a DATE: line; the date can be
4783the time the message was written or the time it is being sent; this
4784can make FCC copies more closely resemble copies that recipients get
4785
4786**** you can specify an arbitrary function for actually transmitting
4787the message; included in feedmail are interfaces for /bin/[r]mail,
4788/usr/lib/sendmail, and elisp smtpmail; it's easy to write a new
4789function for something else (10-20 lines of elisp)
4790
4791** Dired changes
4792
4793*** The Dired function dired-do-toggle, which toggles marked and unmarked
4794files, is now bound to "t" instead of "T".
4795
4796*** dired-at-point has been added to ffap.el. It allows one to easily
4797run Dired on the directory name at point.
4798
4799*** Dired has a new command: %g. It searches the contents of
4800files in the directory and marks each file that contains a match
4801for a specified regexp.
4802
4803** VC Changes
4804
4805*** New option vc-ignore-vc-files lets you turn off version control
4806conveniently.
4807
4808*** VC Dired has been completely rewritten. It is now much
4809faster, especially for CVS, and works very similar to ordinary
4810Dired.
4811
4812VC Dired is invoked by typing C-x v d and entering the name of the
4813directory to display. By default, VC Dired gives you a recursive
4814listing of all files at or below the given directory which are
4815currently locked (for CVS, all files not up-to-date are shown).
4816
4817You can change the listing format by setting vc-dired-recurse to nil,
4818then it shows only the given directory, and you may also set
4819vc-dired-terse-display to nil, then it shows all files under version
4820control plus the names of any subdirectories, so that you can type `i'
4821on such lines to insert them manually, as in ordinary Dired.
4822
4823All Dired commands operate normally in VC Dired, except for `v', which
4824is redefined as the version control prefix. That means you may type
4825`v l', `v =' etc. to invoke `vc-print-log', `vc-diff' and the like on
4826the file named in the current Dired buffer line. `v v' invokes
4827`vc-next-action' on this file, or on all files currently marked.
4828
4829The new command `v t' (vc-dired-toggle-terse-mode) allows you to
4830toggle between terse display (only locked files) and full display (all
4831VC files plus subdirectories). There is also a special command,
4832`* l', to mark all files currently locked.
4833
4834Giving a prefix argument to C-x v d now does the same thing as in
4835ordinary Dired: it allows you to supply additional options for the ls
4836command in the minibuffer, to fine-tune VC Dired's output.
4837
4838*** Under CVS, if you merge changes from the repository into a working
4839file, and CVS detects conflicts, VC now offers to start an ediff
4840session to resolve them.
4841
4842Alternatively, you can use the new command `vc-resolve-conflicts' to
4843resolve conflicts in a file at any time. It works in any buffer that
4844contains conflict markers as generated by rcsmerge (which is what CVS
4845uses as well).
4846
4847*** You can now transfer changes between branches, using the new
4848command vc-merge (C-x v m). It is implemented for RCS and CVS. When
4849you invoke it in a buffer under version-control, you can specify
4850either an entire branch or a pair of versions, and the changes on that
4851branch or between the two versions are merged into the working file.
4852If this results in any conflicts, they may be resolved interactively,
4853using ediff.
4854
4855** Changes in Font Lock
4856
4857*** The face and variable previously known as font-lock-reference-face
4858are now called font-lock-constant-face to better reflect their typical
4859use for highlighting constants and labels. (Its face properties are
4860unchanged.) The variable font-lock-reference-face remains for now for
4861compatibility reasons, but its value is font-lock-constant-face.
4862
4863** Frame name display changes
4864
4865*** The command set-frame-name lets you set the name of the current
4866frame. You can use the new command select-frame-by-name to select and
4867raise a frame; this is mostly useful on character-only terminals, or
4868when many frames are invisible or iconified.
4869
4870*** On character-only terminal (not a window system), changing the
4871frame name is now reflected on the mode line and in the Buffers/Frames
4872menu.
4873
4874** Comint (subshell) changes
4875
4876*** In Comint modes, the commands to kill, stop or interrupt a
4877subjob now also kill pending input. This is for compatibility
4878with ordinary shells, where the signal characters do this.
4879
4880*** There are new commands in Comint mode.
4881
4882C-c C-x fetches the "next" line from the input history;
4883that is, the line after the last line you got.
4884You can use this command to fetch successive lines, one by one.
4885
4886C-c SPC accumulates lines of input. More precisely, it arranges to
4887send the current line together with the following line, when you send
4888the following line.
4889
4890C-c C-a if repeated twice consecutively now moves to the process mark,
4891which separates the pending input from the subprocess output and the
4892previously sent input.
4893
4894C-c M-r now runs comint-previous-matching-input-from-input;
4895it searches for a previous command, using the current pending input
4896as the search string.
4897
4898*** New option compilation-scroll-output can be set to scroll
4899automatically in compilation-mode windows.
4900
4901** C mode changes
4902
4903*** Multiline macros are now handled, both as they affect indentation,
4904and as recognized syntax. New syntactic symbol cpp-macro-cont is
4905assigned to second and subsequent lines of a multiline macro
4906definition.
4907
4908*** A new style "user" which captures all non-hook-ified
4909(i.e. top-level) .emacs file variable settings and customizations.
4910Style "cc-mode" is an alias for "user" and is deprecated. "gnu"
4911style is still the default however.
4912
4913*** "java" style now conforms to Sun's JDK coding style.
4914
4915*** There are new commands c-beginning-of-defun, c-end-of-defun which
4916are alternatives which you could bind to C-M-a and C-M-e if you prefer
4917them. They do not have key bindings by default.
4918
4919*** New and improved implementations of M-a (c-beginning-of-statement)
4920and M-e (c-end-of-statement).
4921
4922*** C++ namespace blocks are supported, with new syntactic symbols
4923namespace-open, namespace-close, and innamespace.
4924
4925*** File local variable settings of c-file-style and c-file-offsets
4926makes the style variables local to that buffer only.
4927
4928*** New indentation functions c-lineup-close-paren,
4929c-indent-one-line-block, c-lineup-dont-change.
4930
4931*** Improvements (hopefully!) to the way CC Mode is loaded. You
4932should now be able to do a (require 'cc-mode) to get the entire
4933package loaded properly for customization in your .emacs file. A new
4934variable c-initialize-on-load controls this and is t by default.
4935
4936** Changes to hippie-expand.
4937
4938*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-skip-space'. If
4939non-nil, trailing spaces may be included in the abbreviation to search for,
4940which then gives the same behavior as the original `dabbrev-expand'.
4941
4942*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-as-symbol'. If
4943non-nil, characters of syntax '_' is considered part of the word when
4944expanding dynamically.
4945
4946*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-no-restriction'. If
4947non-nil, narrowed buffers are widened before they are searched.
4948
4949*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-only-buffers'. If
4950non-empty, buffers searched are restricted to the types specified in
4951this list. Useful for example when constructing new special-purpose
4952expansion functions with `make-hippie-expand-function'.
4953
4954*** Text properties of the expansion are no longer copied.
4955
4956** Changes in BibTeX mode.
4957
4958*** Any titleword matching a regexp in the new variable
4959bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore (case sensitive) is ignored during
4960automatic key generation. This replaces variable
4961bibtex-autokey-titleword-first-ignore, which only checked for matches
4962against the first word in the title.
4963
4964*** Autokey generation now uses all words from the title, not just
4965capitalized words. To avoid conflicts with existing customizations,
4966bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore is set up such that words starting with
4967lowerkey characters will still be ignored. Thus, if you want to use
4968lowercase words from the title, you will have to overwrite the
4969bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore standard setting.
4970
4971*** Case conversion of names and title words for automatic key
4972generation is more flexible. Variable bibtex-autokey-preserve-case is
4973replaced by bibtex-autokey-titleword-case-convert and
4974bibtex-autokey-name-case-convert.
4975
4976** Changes in vcursor.el.
4977
4978*** Support for character terminals is available: there is a new keymap
4979and the vcursor will appear as an arrow between buffer text. A
4980variable `vcursor-interpret-input' allows input from the vcursor to be
4981entered exactly as if typed. Numerous functions, including
4982`vcursor-compare-windows', have been rewritten to improve consistency
4983in the selection of windows and corresponding keymaps.
4984
4985*** vcursor options can now be altered with M-x customize under the
4986Editing group once the package is loaded.
4987
4988*** Loading vcursor now does not define keys by default, as this is
4989generally a bad side effect. Use M-x customize to set
4990vcursor-key-bindings to t to restore the old behaviour.
4991
4992*** vcursor-auto-disable can be `copy', which turns off copying from the
4993vcursor, but doesn't disable it, after any non-vcursor command.
4994
4995** Ispell changes.
4996
4997*** You can now spell check comments and strings in the current
4998buffer with M-x ispell-comments-and-strings. Comments and strings
4999are identified by syntax tables in effect.
5000
5001*** Generic region skipping implemented.
5002A single buffer can be broken into a number of regions where text will
5003and will not be checked. The definitions of the regions can be user
5004defined. New applications and improvements made available by this
5005include:
5006
5007 o URLs are automatically skipped
5008 o EMail message checking is vastly improved.
5009
5010*** Ispell can highlight the erroneous word even on non-window terminals.
5011
5012** Changes to RefTeX mode
5013
5014RefTeX has been updated in order to make it more usable with very
5015large projects (like a several volume math book). The parser has been
5016re-written from scratch. To get maximum speed from RefTeX, check the
5017section `Optimizations' in the manual.
5018
5019*** New recursive parser.
5020
5021The old version of RefTeX created a single large buffer containing the
5022entire multifile document in order to parse the document. The new
5023recursive parser scans the individual files.
5024
5025*** Parsing only part of a document.
5026
5027Reparsing of changed document parts can now be made faster by enabling
5028partial scans. To use this feature, read the documentation string of
5029the variable `reftex-enable-partial-scans' and set the variable to t.
5030
5031 (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t)
5032
5033*** Storing parsing information in a file.
5034
5035This can improve startup times considerably. To turn it on, use
5036
5037 (setq reftex-save-parse-info t)
5038
5039*** Using multiple selection buffers
5040
5041If the creation of label selection buffers is too slow (this happens
5042for large documents), you can reuse these buffers by setting
5043
5044 (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t)
5045
5046*** References to external documents.
5047
5048The LaTeX package `xr' allows to cross-reference labels in external
5049documents. RefTeX can provide information about the external
5050documents as well. To use this feature, set up the \externaldocument
5051macros required by the `xr' package and rescan the document with
5052RefTeX. The external labels can then be accessed with the `x' key in
5053the selection buffer provided by `reftex-reference' (bound to `C-c )').
5054The `x' key also works in the table of contents buffer.
5055
5056*** Many more labeled LaTeX environments are recognized by default.
5057
5058The builtin command list now covers all the standard LaTeX commands,
5059and all of the major packages included in the LaTeX distribution.
5060
5061Also, RefTeX now understands the \appendix macro and changes
5062the enumeration of sections in the *toc* buffer accordingly.
5063
5064*** Mouse support for selection and *toc* buffers
5065
5066The mouse can now be used to select items in the selection and *toc*
5067buffers. See also the new option `reftex-highlight-selection'.
5068
5069*** New keymaps for selection and table of contents modes.
5070
5071The selection processes for labels and citation keys, and the table of
5072contents buffer now have their own keymaps: `reftex-select-label-map',
5073`reftex-select-bib-map', `reftex-toc-map'. The selection processes
5074have a number of new keys predefined. In particular, TAB lets you
5075enter a label with completion. Check the on-the-fly help (press `?'
5076at the selection prompt) or read the Info documentation to find out
5077more.
5078
5079*** Support for the varioref package
5080
5081The `v' key in the label selection buffer toggles \ref versus \vref.
5082
5083*** New hooks
5084
5085Three new hooks can be used to redefine the way labels, references,
5086and citations are created. These hooks are
5087`reftex-format-label-function', `reftex-format-ref-function',
5088`reftex-format-cite-function'.
5089
5090*** Citations outside LaTeX
5091
5092The command `reftex-citation' may also be used outside LaTeX (e.g. in
5093a mail buffer). See the Info documentation for details.
5094
5095*** Short context is no longer fontified.
5096
5097The short context in the label menu no longer copies the
5098fontification from the text in the buffer. If you prefer it to be
5099fontified, use
5100
5101 (setq reftex-refontify-context t)
5102
5103** file-cache-minibuffer-complete now accepts a prefix argument.
5104With a prefix argument, it does not try to do completion of
5105the file name within its directory; it only checks for other
5106directories that contain the same file name.
5107
5108Thus, given the file name Makefile, and assuming that a file
5109Makefile.in exists in the same directory, ordinary
5110file-cache-minibuffer-complete will try to complete Makefile to
5111Makefile.in and will therefore never look for other directories that
5112have Makefile. A prefix argument tells it not to look for longer
5113names such as Makefile.in, so that instead it will look for other
5114directories--just as if the name were already complete in its present
5115directory.
5116
5117** New modes and packages
5118
5119*** There is a new alternative major mode for Perl, Cperl mode.
5120It has many more features than Perl mode, and some people prefer
5121it, but some do not.
5122
5123*** There is a new major mode, M-x vhdl-mode, for editing files of VHDL
5124code.
5125
5126*** M-x which-function-mode enables a minor mode that displays the
5127current function name continuously in the mode line, as you move
5128around in a buffer.
5129
5130Which Function mode is effective in major modes which support Imenu.
5131
5132*** Gametree is a major mode for editing game analysis trees. The author
5133uses it for keeping notes about his postal Chess games, but it should
5134be helpful for other two-player games as well, as long as they have an
5135established system of notation similar to Chess.
5136
5137*** The new minor mode checkdoc-minor-mode provides Emacs Lisp
5138documentation string checking for style and spelling. The style
5139guidelines are found in the Emacs Lisp programming manual.
5140
5141*** The net-utils package makes some common networking features
5142available in Emacs. Some of these functions are wrappers around
5143system utilities (ping, nslookup, etc); others are implementations of
5144simple protocols (finger, whois) in Emacs Lisp. There are also
5145functions to make simple connections to TCP/IP ports for debugging and
5146the like.
5147
5148*** highlight-changes-mode is a minor mode that uses colors to
5149identify recently changed parts of the buffer text.
5150
5151*** The new package `midnight' lets you specify things to be done
5152within Emacs at midnight--by default, kill buffers that you have not
5153used in a considerable time. To use this feature, customize
5154the user option `midnight-mode' to t.
5155
5156*** The file generic-x.el defines a number of simple major modes.
5157
5158 apache-generic-mode: For Apache and NCSA httpd configuration files
5159 samba-generic-mode: Samba configuration files
5160 fvwm-generic-mode: For fvwm initialization files
5161 x-resource-generic-mode: For X resource files
5162 hosts-generic-mode: For hosts files (.rhosts, /etc/hosts, etc)
5163 mailagent-rules-generic-mode: For mailagent .rules files
5164 javascript-generic-mode: For JavaScript files
5165 vrml-generic-mode: For VRML files
5166 java-manifest-generic-mode: For Java MANIFEST files
5167 java-properties-generic-mode: For Java property files
5168 mailrc-generic-mode: For .mailrc files
5169
5170 Platform-specific modes:
5171
5172 prototype-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V prototype files
5173 pkginfo-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V pkginfo files
5174 alias-generic-mode: For C shell alias files
5175 inf-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INF files
5176 ini-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INI files
5177 reg-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Registry files
5178 bat-generic-mode: For MS-Windows BAT scripts
5179 rc-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Resource files
5180 rul-generic-mode: For InstallShield scripts
5181\f
5182* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 since the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
5183
5184** If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode,
5185use -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line.
5186That will force Emacs to read that file in unibyte mode.
5187Otherwise, the file will be loaded and byte-compiled in multibyte mode.
5188
5189Thus, each lisp file is read in a consistent way regardless of whether
5190you started Emacs with --unibyte, so that a Lisp program gives
5191consistent results regardless of how Emacs was started.
5192
5193** The new function assoc-default is useful for searching an alist,
5194and using a default value if the key is not found there. You can
5195specify a comparison predicate, so this function is useful for
5196searching comparing a string against an alist of regular expressions.
5197
5198** The functions unibyte-char-to-multibyte and
5199multibyte-char-to-unibyte convert between unibyte and multibyte
5200character codes, in a way that is appropriate for the current language
5201environment.
5202
5203** The functions read-event, read-char and read-char-exclusive now
5204take two optional arguments. PROMPT, if non-nil, specifies a prompt
5205string. SUPPRESS-INPUT-METHOD, if non-nil, says to disable the
5206current input method for reading this one event.
5207
5208** Two new variables print-escape-nonascii and print-escape-multibyte
5209now control whether to output certain characters as
5210backslash-sequences. print-escape-nonascii applies to single-byte
5211non-ASCII characters; print-escape-multibyte applies to multibyte
5212characters. Both of these variables are used only when printing
5213in readable fashion (prin1 uses them, princ does not).
5214\f
5215* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 before the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
5216
5217** Compiled Emacs Lisp files made with the modified "MBSK" version
5218of Emacs 20.2 do not work in Emacs 20.3.
5219
5220** Buffer positions are now measured in characters, as they were
5221in Emacs 19 and before. This means that (forward-char 1)
5222always increases point by 1.
5223
5224The function chars-in-region now just subtracts its arguments. It is
5225considered obsolete. The function char-boundary-p has been deleted.
5226
5227See below for additional changes relating to multibyte characters.
5228
5229** defcustom, defface and defgroup now accept the keyword `:version'.
5230Use this to specify in which version of Emacs a certain variable's
5231default value changed. For example,
5232
5233 (defcustom foo-max 34 "*Maximum number of foo's allowed."
5234 :type 'integer
5235 :group 'foo
5236 :version "20.3")
5237
5238 (defgroup foo-group nil "The foo group."
5239 :version "20.3")
5240
5241If an entire new group is added or the variables in it have the
5242default values changed, then just add a `:version' to that group. It
5243is recommended that new packages added to the distribution contain a
5244`:version' in the top level group.
5245
5246This information is used to control the customize-changed-options command.
5247
5248** It is now an error to change the value of a symbol whose name
5249starts with a colon--if it is interned in the standard obarray.
5250
5251However, setting such a symbol to its proper value, which is that
5252symbol itself, is not an error. This is for the sake of programs that
5253support previous Emacs versions by explicitly setting these variables
5254to themselves.
5255
5256If you set the variable keyword-symbols-constant-flag to nil,
5257this error is suppressed, and you can set these symbols to any
5258values whatever.
5259
5260** There is a new debugger command, R.
5261It evaluates an expression like e, but saves the result
5262in the buffer *Debugger-record*.
5263
5264** Frame-local variables.
5265
5266You can now make a variable local to various frames. To do this, call
5267the function make-variable-frame-local; this enables frames to have
5268local bindings for that variable.
5269
5270These frame-local bindings are actually frame parameters: you create a
5271frame-local binding in a specific frame by calling
5272modify-frame-parameters and specifying the variable name as the
5273parameter name.
5274
5275Buffer-local bindings take precedence over frame-local bindings.
5276Thus, if the current buffer has a buffer-local binding, that binding is
5277active; otherwise, if the selected frame has a frame-local binding,
5278that binding is active; otherwise, the default binding is active.
5279
5280It would not be hard to implement window-local bindings, but it is not
5281clear that this would be very useful; windows tend to come and go in a
5282very transitory fashion, so that trying to produce any specific effect
5283through a window-local binding would not be very robust.
5284
5285** `sregexq' and `sregex' are two new functions for constructing
5286"symbolic regular expressions." These are Lisp expressions that, when
5287evaluated, yield conventional string-based regexps. The symbolic form
5288makes it easier to construct, read, and maintain complex patterns.
5289See the documentation in sregex.el.
5290
5291** parse-partial-sexp's return value has an additional element which
5292is used to pass information along if you pass it to another call to
5293parse-partial-sexp, starting its scan where the first call ended.
5294The contents of this field are not yet finalized.
5295
5296** eval-region now accepts a fourth optional argument READ-FUNCTION.
5297If it is non-nil, that function is used instead of `read'.
5298
5299** unload-feature by default removes the feature's functions from
5300known hooks to avoid trouble, but a package providing FEATURE can
5301define a hook FEATURE-unload-hook to be run by unload-feature instead.
5302
5303** read-from-minibuffer no longer returns the argument DEFAULT-VALUE
5304when the user enters empty input. It now returns the null string, as
5305it did in Emacs 19. The default value is made available in the
5306history via M-n, but it is not applied here as a default.
5307
5308The other, more specialized minibuffer-reading functions continue to
5309return the default value (not the null string) when the user enters
5310empty input.
5311
5312** The new variable read-buffer-function controls which routine to use
5313for selecting buffers. For example, if you set this variable to
5314`iswitchb-read-buffer', iswitchb will be used to read buffer names.
5315Other functions can also be used if they accept the same arguments as
5316`read-buffer' and return the selected buffer name as a string.
5317
5318** The new function read-passwd reads a password from the terminal,
5319echoing a period for each character typed. It takes three arguments:
5320a prompt string, a flag which says "read it twice to make sure", and a
5321default password to use if the user enters nothing.
5322
5323** The variable fill-nobreak-predicate gives major modes a way to
5324specify not to break a line at certain places. Its value is a
5325function which is called with no arguments, with point located at the
5326place where a break is being considered. If the function returns
5327non-nil, then the line won't be broken there.
5328
5329** window-end now takes an optional second argument, UPDATE.
5330If this is non-nil, then the function always returns an accurate
5331up-to-date value for the buffer position corresponding to the
5332end of the window, even if this requires computation.
5333
5334** other-buffer now takes an optional argument FRAME
5335which specifies which frame's buffer list to use.
5336If it is nil, that means use the selected frame's buffer list.
5337
5338** The new variable buffer-display-time, always local in every buffer,
5339holds the value of (current-time) as of the last time that a window
5340was directed to display this buffer.
5341
5342** It is now meaningful to compare two window-configuration objects
5343with `equal'. Two window-configuration objects are equal if they
5344describe equivalent arrangements of windows, in the same frame--in
5345other words, if they would give the same results if passed to
5346set-window-configuration.
5347
5348** compare-window-configurations is a new function that compares two
5349window configurations loosely. It ignores differences in saved buffer
5350positions and scrolling, and considers only the structure and sizes of
5351windows and the choice of buffers to display.
5352
5353** The variable minor-mode-overriding-map-alist allows major modes to
5354override the key bindings of a minor mode. The elements of this alist
5355look like the elements of minor-mode-map-alist: (VARIABLE . KEYMAP).
5356
5357If the VARIABLE in an element of minor-mode-overriding-map-alist has a
5358non-nil value, the paired KEYMAP is active, and totally overrides the
5359map (if any) specified for the same variable in minor-mode-map-alist.
5360
5361minor-mode-overriding-map-alist is automatically local in all buffers,
5362and it is meant to be set by major modes.
5363
5364** The function match-string-no-properties is like match-string
5365except that it discards all text properties from the result.
5366
5367** The function load-average now accepts an optional argument
5368USE-FLOATS. If it is non-nil, the load average values are returned as
5369floating point numbers, rather than as integers to be divided by 100.
5370
5371** The new variable temporary-file-directory specifies the directory
5372to use for creating temporary files. The default value is determined
5373in a reasonable way for your operating system; on GNU and Unix systems
5374it is based on the TMP and TMPDIR environment variables.
5375
5376** Menu changes
5377
5378*** easymenu.el now uses the new menu item format and supports the
5379keywords :visible and :filter. The existing keyword :keys is now
5380better supported.
5381
5382The variable `easy-menu-precalculate-equivalent-keybindings' controls
5383a new feature which calculates keyboard equivalents for the menu when
5384you define the menu. The default is t. If you rarely use menus, you
5385can set the variable to nil to disable this precalculation feature;
5386then the calculation is done only if you use the menu bar.
5387
5388*** A new format for menu items is supported.
5389
5390In a keymap, a key binding that has the format
5391 (STRING . REAL-BINDING) or (STRING HELP-STRING . REAL-BINDING)
5392defines a menu item. Now a menu item definition may also be a list that
5393starts with the symbol `menu-item'.
5394
5395The format is:
5396 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) or
5397 (menu-item ITEM-NAME REAL-BINDING . ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST)
5398where ITEM-NAME is an expression which evaluates to the menu item
5399string, and ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST has the form of a property list.
5400The supported properties include
5401
5402:enable FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
5403 item is enabled.
5404:visible FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
5405 item should appear in the menu.
5406:filter FILTER-FN
5407 FILTER-FN is a function of one argument,
5408 which will be REAL-BINDING.
5409 It should return a binding to use instead.
5410:keys DESCRIPTION
5411 DESCRIPTION is a string that describes an equivalent keyboard
5412 binding for for REAL-BINDING. DESCRIPTION is expanded with
5413 `substitute-command-keys' before it is used.
5414:key-sequence KEY-SEQUENCE
5415 KEY-SEQUENCE is a key-sequence for an equivalent
5416 keyboard binding.
5417:key-sequence nil
5418 This means that the command normally has no
5419 keyboard equivalent.
5420:help HELP HELP is the extra help string (not currently used).
5421:button (TYPE . SELECTED)
5422 TYPE is :toggle or :radio.
5423 SELECTED is a form, to be evaluated, and its
5424 value says whether this button is currently selected.
5425
5426Buttons are at the moment only simulated by prefixes in the menu.
5427Eventually ordinary X-buttons may be supported.
5428
5429(menu-item ITEM-NAME) defines unselectable item.
5430
5431** New event types
5432
5433*** The new event type `mouse-wheel' is generated by a wheel on a
5434mouse (such as the MS Intellimouse). The event contains a delta that
5435corresponds to the amount and direction that the wheel is rotated,
5436which is typically used to implement a scroll or zoom. The format is:
5437
5438 (mouse-wheel POSITION DELTA)
5439
5440where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
5441same format as a mouse-click event, and DELTA is a signed number
5442indicating the number of increments by which the wheel was rotated. A
5443negative DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated backwards, towards
5444the user, and a positive DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated
5445forward, away from the user.
5446
5447As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
5448
5449*** The new event type `drag-n-drop' is generated when a group of
5450files is selected in an application outside of Emacs, and then dragged
5451and dropped onto an Emacs frame. The event contains a list of
5452filenames that were dragged and dropped, which are then typically
5453loaded into Emacs. The format is:
5454
5455 (drag-n-drop POSITION FILES)
5456
5457where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
5458same format as a mouse-click event, and FILES is the list of filenames
5459that were dragged and dropped.
5460
5461As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
5462
5463** Changes relating to multibyte characters.
5464
5465*** The variable enable-multibyte-characters is now read-only;
5466any attempt to set it directly signals an error. The only way
5467to change this value in an existing buffer is with set-buffer-multibyte.
5468
5469*** In a string constant, `\ ' now stands for "nothing at all". You
5470can use it to terminate a hex escape which is followed by a character
5471that could otherwise be read as part of the hex escape.
5472
5473*** String indices are now measured in characters, as they were
5474in Emacs 19 and before.
5475
5476The function chars-in-string has been deleted.
5477The function concat-chars has been renamed to `string'.
5478
5479*** The function set-buffer-multibyte sets the flag in the current
5480buffer that says whether the buffer uses multibyte representation or
5481unibyte representation. If the argument is nil, it selects unibyte
5482representation. Otherwise it selects multibyte representation.
5483
5484This function does not change the contents of the buffer, viewed
5485as a sequence of bytes. However, it does change the contents
5486viewed as characters; a sequence of two bytes which is treated as
5487one character when the buffer uses multibyte representation
5488will count as two characters using unibyte representation.
5489
5490This function sets enable-multibyte-characters to record which
5491representation is in use. It also adjusts various data in the buffer
5492(including its markers, overlays and text properties) so that they are
5493consistent with the new representation.
5494
5495*** string-make-multibyte takes a string and converts it to multibyte
5496representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care
5497about the representation, because Emacs converts when necessary;
5498however, it makes a difference when you compare strings.
5499
5500The conversion of non-ASCII characters works by adding the value of
5501nonascii-insert-offset to each character, or by translating them
5502using the table nonascii-translation-table.
5503
5504*** string-make-unibyte takes a string and converts it to unibyte
5505representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care about the
5506representation, but it makes a difference when you compare strings.
5507
5508The conversion from multibyte to unibyte representation
5509loses information; the only time Emacs performs it automatically
5510is when inserting a multibyte string into a unibyte buffer.
5511
5512*** string-as-multibyte takes a string, and returns another string
5513which contains the same bytes, but treats them as multibyte.
5514
5515*** string-as-unibyte takes a string, and returns another string
5516which contains the same bytes, but treats them as unibyte.
5517
5518*** The new function compare-strings lets you compare
5519portions of two strings. Unibyte strings are converted to multibyte,
5520so that a unibyte string can match a multibyte string.
5521You can specify whether to ignore case or not.
5522
5523*** assoc-ignore-case now uses compare-strings so that
5524it can treat unibyte and multibyte strings as equal.
5525
5526*** Regular expression operations and buffer string searches now
5527convert the search pattern to multibyte or unibyte to accord with the
5528buffer or string being searched.
5529
5530One consequence is that you cannot always use \200-\377 inside of
5531[...] to match all non-ASCII characters. This does still work when
5532searching or matching a unibyte buffer or string, but not when
5533searching or matching a multibyte string. Unfortunately, there is no
5534obvious choice of syntax to use within [...] for that job. But, what
5535you want is just to match all non-ASCII characters, the regular
5536expression [^\0-\177] works for it.
5537
5538*** Structure of coding system changed.
5539
5540All coding systems (including aliases and subsidiaries) are named
5541by symbols; the symbol's `coding-system' property is a vector
5542which defines the coding system. Aliases share the same vector
5543as the principal name, so that altering the contents of this
5544vector affects the principal name and its aliases. You can define
5545your own alias name of a coding system by the function
5546define-coding-system-alias.
5547
5548The coding system definition includes a property list of its own. Use
5549the new functions `coding-system-get' and `coding-system-put' to
5550access such coding system properties as post-read-conversion,
5551pre-write-conversion, character-translation-table-for-decode,
5552character-translation-table-for-encode, mime-charset, and
5553safe-charsets. For instance, (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1
5554'mime-charset) gives the corresponding MIME-charset parameter
5555`iso-8859-1'.
5556
5557Among the coding system properties listed above, safe-charsets is new.
5558The value of this property is a list of character sets which this
5559coding system can correctly encode and decode. For instance:
5560(coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 'safe-charsets) => (ascii latin-iso8859-1)
5561
5562Here, "correctly encode" means that the encoded character sets can
5563also be handled safely by systems other than Emacs as far as they
5564are capable of that coding system. Though, Emacs itself can encode
5565the other character sets and read it back correctly.
5566
5567*** The new function select-safe-coding-system can be used to find a
5568proper coding system for encoding the specified region or string.
5569This function requires a user interaction.
5570
5571*** The new functions find-coding-systems-region and
5572find-coding-systems-string are helper functions used by
5573select-safe-coding-system. They return a list of all proper coding
5574systems to encode a text in some region or string. If you don't want
5575a user interaction, use one of these functions instead of
5576select-safe-coding-system.
5577
5578*** The explicit encoding and decoding functions, such as
5579decode-coding-region and encode-coding-string, now set
5580last-coding-system-used to reflect the actual way encoding or decoding
5581was done.
5582
5583*** The new function detect-coding-with-language-environment can be
5584used to detect a coding system of text according to priorities of
5585coding systems used by some specific language environment.
5586
5587*** The functions detect-coding-region and detect-coding-string always
5588return a list if the arg HIGHEST is nil. Thus, if only ASCII
5589characters are found, they now return a list of single element
5590`undecided' or its subsidiaries.
5591
5592*** The new functions coding-system-change-eol-conversion and
5593coding-system-change-text-conversion can be used to get a different
5594coding system than what specified only in how end-of-line or text is
5595converted.
5596
5597*** The new function set-selection-coding-system can be used to set a
5598coding system for communicating with other X clients.
5599
5600*** The function `map-char-table' now passes as argument only valid
5601character codes, plus generic characters that stand for entire
5602character sets or entire subrows of a character set. In other words,
5603each time `map-char-table' calls its FUNCTION argument, the key value
5604either will be a valid individual character code, or will stand for a
5605range of characters.
5606
5607*** The new function `char-valid-p' can be used for checking whether a
5608Lisp object is a valid character code or not.
5609
5610*** The new function `charset-after' returns a charset of a character
5611in the current buffer at position POS.
5612
5613*** Input methods are now implemented using the variable
5614input-method-function. If this is non-nil, its value should be a
5615function; then, whenever Emacs reads an input event that is a printing
5616character with no modifier bits, it calls that function, passing the
5617event as an argument. Often this function will read more input, first
5618binding input-method-function to nil.
5619
5620The return value should be a list of the events resulting from input
5621method processing. These events will be processed sequentially as
5622input, before resorting to unread-command-events. Events returned by
5623the input method function are not passed to the input method function,
5624not even if they are printing characters with no modifier bits.
5625
5626The input method function is not called when reading the second and
5627subsequent events of a key sequence.
5628
5629*** You can customize any language environment by using
5630set-language-environment-hook and exit-language-environment-hook.
5631
5632The hook `exit-language-environment-hook' should be used to undo
5633customizations that you made with set-language-environment-hook. For
5634instance, if you set up a special key binding for a specific language
5635environment by set-language-environment-hook, you should set up
5636exit-language-environment-hook to restore the normal key binding.
5637\f
5638* Changes in Emacs 20.1
5639
5640** Emacs has a new facility for customization of its many user
5641options. It is called M-x customize. With this facility you can look
5642at the many user options in an organized way; they are grouped into a
5643tree structure.
5644
5645M-x customize also knows what sorts of values are legitimate for each
5646user option and ensures that you don't use invalid values.
5647
5648With M-x customize, you can set options either for the present Emacs
5649session or permanently. (Permanent settings are stored automatically
5650in your .emacs file.)
5651
5652** Scroll bars are now on the left side of the window.
5653You can change this with M-x customize-option scroll-bar-mode.
5654
5655** The mode line no longer includes the string `Emacs'.
5656This makes more space in the mode line for other information.
5657
5658** When you select a region with the mouse, it is highlighted
5659immediately afterward. At that time, if you type the DELETE key, it
5660kills the region.
5661
5662The BACKSPACE key, and the ASCII character DEL, do not do this; they
5663delete the character before point, as usual.
5664
5665** In an incremental search the whole current match is highlighted
5666on terminals which support this. (You can disable this feature
5667by setting search-highlight to nil.)
5668
5669** In the minibuffer, in some cases, you can now use M-n to
5670insert the default value into the minibuffer as text. In effect,
5671the default value (if the minibuffer routines know it) is tacked
5672onto the history "in the future". (The more normal use of the
5673history list is to use M-p to insert minibuffer input used in the
5674past.)
5675
5676** In Text mode, now only blank lines separate paragraphs.
5677This makes it possible to get the full benefit of Adaptive Fill mode
5678in Text mode, and other modes derived from it (such as Mail mode).
5679TAB in Text mode now runs the command indent-relative; this
5680makes a practical difference only when you use indented paragraphs.
5681
5682As a result, the old Indented Text mode is now identical to Text mode,
5683and is an alias for it.
5684
5685If you want spaces at the beginning of a line to start a paragraph,
5686use the new mode, Paragraph Indent Text mode.
5687
5688** Scrolling changes
5689
5690*** Scroll commands to scroll a whole screen now preserve the screen
5691position of the cursor, if scroll-preserve-screen-position is non-nil.
5692
5693In this mode, if you scroll several screens back and forth, finishing
5694on the same screen where you started, the cursor goes back to the line
5695where it started.
5696
5697*** If you set scroll-conservatively to a small number, then when you
5698move point a short distance off the screen, Emacs will scroll the
5699screen just far enough to bring point back on screen, provided that
5700does not exceed `scroll-conservatively' lines.
5701
5702*** The new variable scroll-margin says how close point can come to the
5703top or bottom of a window. It is a number of screen lines; if point
5704comes within that many lines of the top or bottom of the window, Emacs
5705recenters the window.
5706
5707** International character set support (MULE)
5708
5709Emacs now supports a wide variety of international character sets,
5710including European variants of the Latin alphabet, as well as Chinese,
5711Devanagari (Hindi and Marathi), Ethiopian, Greek, IPA, Japanese,
5712Korean, Lao, Russian, Thai, Tibetan, and Vietnamese scripts. These
5713features have been merged from the modified version of Emacs known as
5714MULE (for "MULti-lingual Enhancement to GNU Emacs")
5715
5716Users of these scripts have established many more-or-less standard
5717coding systems for storing files. Emacs uses a single multibyte
5718character encoding within Emacs buffers; it can translate from a wide
5719variety of coding systems when reading a file and can translate back
5720into any of these coding systems when saving a file.
5721
5722Keyboards, even in the countries where these character sets are used,
5723generally don't have keys for all the characters in them. So Emacs
5724supports various "input methods", typically one for each script or
5725language, to make it possible to type them.
5726
5727The Emacs internal multibyte encoding represents a non-ASCII
5728character as a sequence of bytes in the range 0200 through 0377.
5729
5730The new prefix key C-x RET is used for commands that pertain
5731to multibyte characters, coding systems, and input methods.
5732
5733You can disable multibyte character support as follows:
5734
5735 (setq-default enable-multibyte-characters nil)
5736
5737Calling the function standard-display-european turns off multibyte
5738characters, unless you specify a non-nil value for the second
5739argument, AUTO. This provides compatibility for people who are
5740already using standard-display-european to continue using unibyte
5741characters for their work until they want to change.
5742
5743*** Input methods
5744
5745An input method is a kind of character conversion which is designed
5746specifically for interactive input. In Emacs, typically each language
5747has its own input method (though sometimes several languages which use
5748the same characters can share one input method). Some languages
5749support several input methods.
5750
5751The simplest kind of input method works by mapping ASCII letters into
5752another alphabet. This is how the Greek and Russian input methods
5753work.
5754
5755A more powerful technique is composition: converting sequences of
5756characters into one letter. Many European input methods use
5757composition to produce a single non-ASCII letter from a sequence which
5758consists of a letter followed by diacritics. For example, a' is one
5759sequence of two characters that might be converted into a single
5760letter.
5761
5762The input methods for syllabic scripts typically use mapping followed
5763by conversion. The input methods for Thai and Korean work this way.
5764First, letters are mapped into symbols for particular sounds or tone
5765marks; then, sequences of these which make up a whole syllable are
5766mapped into one syllable sign--most often a "composite character".
5767
5768None of these methods works very well for Chinese and Japanese, so
5769they are handled specially. First you input a whole word using
5770phonetic spelling; then, after the word is in the buffer, Emacs
5771converts it into one or more characters using a large dictionary.
5772
5773Since there is more than one way to represent a phonetically spelled
5774word using Chinese characters, Emacs can only guess which one to use;
5775typically these input methods give you a way to say "guess again" if
5776the first guess is wrong.
5777
5778*** The command C-x RET m (toggle-enable-multibyte-characters)
5779turns multibyte character support on or off for the current buffer.
5780
5781If multibyte character support is turned off in a buffer, then each
5782byte is a single character, even codes 0200 through 0377--exactly as
5783they did in Emacs 19.34. This includes the features for support for
5784the European characters, ISO Latin-1 and ISO Latin-2.
5785
5786However, there is no need to turn off multibyte character support to
5787use ISO Latin-1 or ISO Latin-2; the Emacs multibyte character set
5788includes all the characters in these character sets, and Emacs can
5789translate automatically to and from either one.
5790
5791*** Visiting a file in unibyte mode.
5792
5793Turning off multibyte character support in the buffer after visiting a
5794file with multibyte code conversion will display the multibyte
5795sequences already in the buffer, byte by byte. This is probably not
5796what you want.
5797
5798If you want to edit a file of unibyte characters (Latin-1, for
5799example), you can do it by specifying `no-conversion' as the coding
5800system when reading the file. This coding system also turns off
5801multibyte characters in that buffer.
5802
5803If you turn off multibyte character support entirely, this turns off
5804character conversion as well.
5805
5806*** Displaying international characters on X Windows.
5807
5808A font for X typically displays just one alphabet or script.
5809Therefore, displaying the entire range of characters Emacs supports
5810requires using many fonts.
5811
5812Therefore, Emacs now supports "fontsets". Each fontset is a
5813collection of fonts, each assigned to a range of character codes.
5814
5815A fontset has a name, like a font. Individual fonts are defined by
5816the X server; fontsets are defined within Emacs itself. But once you
5817have defined a fontset, you can use it in a face or a frame just as
5818you would use a font.
5819
5820If a fontset specifies no font for a certain character, or if it
5821specifies a font that does not exist on your system, then it cannot
5822display that character. It will display an empty box instead.
5823
5824The fontset height and width are determined by the ASCII characters
5825(that is, by the font in the fontset which is used for ASCII
5826characters). If another font in the fontset has a different height,
5827or the wrong width, then characters assigned to that font are clipped,
5828and displayed within a box if highlight-wrong-size-font is non-nil.
5829
5830*** Defining fontsets.
5831
5832Emacs does not use any fontset by default. Its default font is still
5833chosen as in previous versions. You can tell Emacs to use a fontset
5834with the `-fn' option or the `Font' X resource.
5835
5836Emacs creates a standard fontset automatically according to the value
5837of standard-fontset-spec. This fontset's short name is
5838`fontset-standard'. Bold, italic, and bold-italic variants of the
5839standard fontset are created automatically.
5840
5841If you specify a default ASCII font with the `Font' resource or `-fn'
5842argument, a fontset is generated from it. This works by replacing the
5843FOUNDARY, FAMILY, ADD_STYLE, and AVERAGE_WIDTH fields of the font name
5844with `*' then using this to specify a fontset. This fontset's short
5845name is `fontset-startup'.
5846
5847Emacs checks resources of the form Fontset-N where N is 0, 1, 2...
5848The resource value should have this form:
5849 FONTSET-NAME, [CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME]...
5850FONTSET-NAME should have the form of a standard X font name, except:
5851 * most fields should be just the wild card "*".
5852 * the CHARSET_REGISTRY field should be "fontset"
5853 * the CHARSET_ENCODING field can be any nickname of the fontset.
5854The construct CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME can be repeated any number
5855of times; each time specifies the font for one character set.
5856CHARSET-NAME should be the name name of a character set, and
5857FONT-NAME should specify an actual font to use for that character set.
5858
5859Each of these fontsets has an alias which is made from the
5860last two font name fields, CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING.
5861You can refer to the fontset by that alias or by its full name.
5862
5863For any character sets that you don't mention, Emacs tries to choose a
5864font by substituting into FONTSET-NAME. For instance, with the
5865following resource,
5866 Emacs*Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24
5867the font for ASCII is generated as below:
5868 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1
5869Here is the substitution rule:
5870 Change CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING to that of the charset
5871 defined in the variable x-charset-registries. For instance, ASCII has
5872 the entry (ascii . "ISO8859-1") in this variable. Then, reduce
5873 sequences of wild cards -*-...-*- with a single wildcard -*-.
5874 (This is to prevent use of auto-scaled fonts.)
5875
5876The function which processes the fontset resource value to create the
5877fontset is called create-fontset-from-fontset-spec. You can also call
5878that function explicitly to create a fontset.
5879
5880With the X resource Emacs.Font, you can specify a fontset name just
5881like an actual font name. But be careful not to specify a fontset
5882name in a wildcard resource like Emacs*Font--that tries to specify the
5883fontset for other purposes including menus, and they cannot handle
5884fontsets.
5885
5886*** The command M-x set-language-environment sets certain global Emacs
5887defaults for a particular choice of language.
5888
5889Selecting a language environment typically specifies a default input
5890method and which coding systems to recognize automatically when
5891visiting files. However, it does not try to reread files you have
5892already visited; the text in those buffers is not affected. The
5893language environment may also specify a default choice of coding
5894system for new files that you create.
5895
5896It makes no difference which buffer is current when you use
5897set-language-environment, because these defaults apply globally to the
5898whole Emacs session.
5899
5900For example, M-x set-language-environment RET Latin-1 RET
5901chooses the Latin-1 character set. In the .emacs file, you can do this
5902with (set-language-environment "Latin-1").
5903
5904*** The command C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system)
5905specifies the file coding system for the current buffer. This
5906specifies what sort of character code translation to do when saving
5907the file. As an argument, you must specify the name of one of the
5908coding systems that Emacs supports.
5909
5910*** The command C-x RET c (universal-coding-system-argument)
5911lets you specify a coding system when you read or write a file.
5912This command uses the minibuffer to read a coding system name.
5913After you exit the minibuffer, the specified coding system
5914is used for *the immediately following command*.
5915
5916So if the immediately following command is a command to read or
5917write a file, it uses the specified coding system for that file.
5918
5919If the immediately following command does not use the coding system,
5920then C-x RET c ultimately has no effect.
5921
5922For example, C-x RET c iso-8859-1 RET C-x C-f temp RET
5923visits the file `temp' treating it as ISO Latin-1.
5924
5925*** You can specify the coding system for a file using the -*-
5926construct. Include `coding: CODINGSYSTEM;' inside the -*-...-*-
5927to specify use of coding system CODINGSYSTEM. You can also
5928specify the coding system in a local variable list at the end
5929of the file.
5930
5931*** The command C-x RET t (set-terminal-coding-system) specifies
5932the coding system for terminal output. If you specify a character
5933code for terminal output, all characters output to the terminal are
5934translated into that character code.
5935
5936This feature is useful for certain character-only terminals built in
5937various countries to support the languages of those countries.
5938
5939By default, output to the terminal is not translated at all.
5940
5941*** The command C-x RET k (set-keyboard-coding-system) specifies
5942the coding system for keyboard input.
5943
5944Character code translation of keyboard input is useful for terminals
5945with keys that send non-ASCII graphic characters--for example,
5946some terminals designed for ISO Latin-1 or subsets of it.
5947
5948By default, keyboard input is not translated at all.
5949
5950Character code translation of keyboard input is similar to using an
5951input method, in that both define sequences of keyboard input that
5952translate into single characters. However, input methods are designed
5953to be convenient for interactive use, while the code translations are
5954designed to work with terminals.
5955
5956*** The command C-x RET p (set-buffer-process-coding-system)
5957specifies the coding system for input and output to a subprocess.
5958This command applies to the current buffer; normally, each subprocess
5959has its own buffer, and thus you can use this command to specify
5960translation to and from a particular subprocess by giving the command
5961in the corresponding buffer.
5962
5963By default, process input and output are not translated at all.
5964
5965*** The variable file-name-coding-system specifies the coding system
5966to use for encoding file names before operating on them.
5967It is also used for decoding file names obtained from the system.
5968
5969*** The command C-\ (toggle-input-method) activates or deactivates
5970an input method. If no input method has been selected before, the
5971command prompts for you to specify the language and input method you
5972want to use.
5973
5974C-u C-\ (select-input-method) lets you switch to a different input
5975method. C-h C-\ (or C-h I) describes the current input method.
5976
5977*** Some input methods remap the keyboard to emulate various keyboard
5978layouts commonly used for particular scripts. How to do this
5979remapping properly depends on your actual keyboard layout. To specify
5980which layout your keyboard has, use M-x quail-set-keyboard-layout.
5981
5982*** The command C-h C (describe-coding-system) displays
5983the coding systems currently selected for various purposes, plus
5984related information.
5985
5986*** The command C-h h (view-hello-file) displays a file called
5987HELLO, which has examples of text in many languages, using various
5988scripts.
5989
5990*** The command C-h L (describe-language-support) displays
5991information about the support for a particular language.
5992You specify the language as an argument.
5993
5994*** The mode line now contains a letter or character that identifies
5995the coding system used in the visited file. It normally follows the
5996first dash.
5997
5998A dash indicates the default state of affairs: no code conversion
5999(except CRLF => newline if appropriate). `=' means no conversion
6000whatsoever. The ISO 8859 coding systems are represented by digits
60011 through 9. Other coding systems are represented by letters:
6002
6003 A alternativnyj (Russian)
6004 B big5 (Chinese)
6005 C cn-gb-2312 (Chinese)
6006 C iso-2022-cn (Chinese)
6007 D in-is13194-devanagari (Indian languages)
6008 E euc-japan (Japanese)
6009 I iso-2022-cjk or iso-2022-ss2 (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
6010 J junet (iso-2022-7) or old-jis (iso-2022-jp-1978-irv) (Japanese)
6011 K euc-korea (Korean)
6012 R koi8 (Russian)
6013 Q tibetan
6014 S shift_jis (Japanese)
6015 T lao
6016 T tis620 (Thai)
6017 V viscii or vscii (Vietnamese)
6018 i iso-2022-lock (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
6019 k iso-2022-kr (Korean)
6020 v viqr (Vietnamese)
6021 z hz (Chinese)
6022
6023When you are using a character-only terminal (not a window system),
6024two additional characters appear in between the dash and the file
6025coding system. These two characters describe the coding system for
6026keyboard input, and the coding system for terminal output.
6027
6028*** The new variable rmail-file-coding-system specifies the code
6029conversion to use for RMAIL files. The default value is nil.
6030
6031When you read mail with Rmail, each message is decoded automatically
6032into Emacs' internal format. This has nothing to do with
6033rmail-file-coding-system. That variable controls reading and writing
6034Rmail files themselves.
6035
6036*** The new variable sendmail-coding-system specifies the code
6037conversion for outgoing mail. The default value is nil.
6038
6039Actually, there are three different ways of specifying the coding system
6040for sending mail:
6041
6042- If you use C-x RET f in the mail buffer, that takes priority.
6043- Otherwise, if you set sendmail-coding-system non-nil, that specifies it.
6044- Otherwise, the default coding system for new files is used,
6045 if that is non-nil. That comes from your language environment.
6046- Otherwise, Latin-1 is used.
6047
6048*** The command C-h t (help-with-tutorial) accepts a prefix argument
6049to specify the language for the tutorial file. Currently, English,
6050Japanese, Korean and Thai are supported. We welcome additional
6051translations.
6052
6053** An easy new way to visit a file with no code or format conversion
6054of any kind: Use M-x find-file-literally. There is also a command
6055insert-file-literally which inserts a file into the current buffer
6056without any conversion.
6057
6058** C-q's handling of octal character codes is changed.
6059You can now specify any number of octal digits.
6060RET terminates the digits and is discarded;
6061any other non-digit terminates the digits and is then used as input.
6062
6063** There are new commands for looking up Info documentation for
6064functions, variables and file names used in your programs.
6065
6066Type M-x info-lookup-symbol to look up a symbol in the buffer at point.
6067Type M-x info-lookup-file to look up a file in the buffer at point.
6068
6069Precisely which Info files are used to look it up depends on the major
6070mode. For example, in C mode, the GNU libc manual is used.
6071
6072** M-TAB in most programming language modes now runs the command
6073complete-symbol. This command performs completion on the symbol name
6074in the buffer before point.
6075
6076With a numeric argument, it performs completion based on the set of
6077symbols documented in the Info files for the programming language that
6078you are using.
6079
6080With no argument, it does completion based on the current tags tables,
6081just like the old binding of M-TAB (complete-tag).
6082
6083** File locking works with NFS now.
6084
6085The lock file for FILENAME is now a symbolic link named .#FILENAME,
6086in the same directory as FILENAME.
6087
6088This means that collision detection between two different machines now
6089works reasonably well; it also means that no file server or directory
6090can become a bottleneck.
6091
6092The new method does have drawbacks. It means that collision detection
6093does not operate when you edit a file in a directory where you cannot
6094create new files. Collision detection also doesn't operate when the
6095file server does not support symbolic links. But these conditions are
6096rare, and the ability to have collision detection while using NFS is
6097so useful that the change is worth while.
6098
6099When Emacs or a system crashes, this may leave behind lock files which
6100are stale. So you may occasionally get warnings about spurious
6101collisions. When you determine that the collision is spurious, just
6102tell Emacs to go ahead anyway.
6103
6104** If you wish to use Show Paren mode to display matching parentheses,
6105it is no longer sufficient to load paren.el. Instead you must call
6106show-paren-mode.
6107
6108** If you wish to use Delete Selection mode to replace a highlighted
6109selection when you insert new text, it is no longer sufficient to load
6110delsel.el. Instead you must call the function delete-selection-mode.
6111
6112** If you wish to use Partial Completion mode to complete partial words
6113within symbols or filenames, it is no longer sufficient to load
6114complete.el. Instead you must call the function partial-completion-mode.
6115
6116** If you wish to use uniquify to rename buffers for you,
6117it is no longer sufficient to load uniquify.el. You must also
6118set uniquify-buffer-name-style to one of the non-nil legitimate values.
6119
6120** Changes in View mode.
6121
6122*** Several new commands are available in View mode.
6123Do H in view mode for a list of commands.
6124
6125*** There are two new commands for entering View mode:
6126view-file-other-frame and view-buffer-other-frame.
6127
6128*** Exiting View mode does a better job of restoring windows to their
6129previous state.
6130
6131*** New customization variable view-scroll-auto-exit. If non-nil,
6132scrolling past end of buffer makes view mode exit.
6133
6134*** New customization variable view-exits-all-viewing-windows. If
6135non-nil, view-mode will at exit restore all windows viewing buffer,
6136not just the selected window.
6137
6138*** New customization variable view-read-only. If non-nil, visiting a
6139read-only file automatically enters View mode, and toggle-read-only
6140turns View mode on or off.
6141
6142*** New customization variable view-remove-frame-by-deleting controls
6143how to remove a not needed frame at view mode exit. If non-nil,
6144delete the frame, if nil make an icon of it.
6145
6146** C-x v l, the command to print a file's version control log,
6147now positions point at the entry for the file's current branch version.
6148
6149** C-x v =, the command to compare a file with the last checked-in version,
6150has a new feature. If the file is currently not locked, so that it is
6151presumably identical to the last checked-in version, the command now asks
6152which version to compare with.
6153
6154** When using hideshow.el, incremental search can temporarily show hidden
6155blocks if a match is inside the block.
6156
6157The block is hidden again if the search is continued and the next match
6158is outside the block. By customizing the variable
6159isearch-hide-immediately you can choose to hide all the temporarily
6160shown blocks only when exiting from incremental search.
6161
6162By customizing the variable hs-isearch-open you can choose what kind
6163of blocks to temporarily show during isearch: comment blocks, code
6164blocks, all of them or none.
6165
6166** The new command C-x 4 0 (kill-buffer-and-window) kills the
6167current buffer and deletes the selected window. It asks for
6168confirmation first.
6169
6170** C-x C-w, which saves the buffer into a specified file name,
6171now changes the major mode according to that file name.
6172However, the mode will not be changed if
6173(1) a local variables list or the `-*-' line specifies a major mode, or
6174(2) the current major mode is a "special" mode,
6175 not suitable for ordinary files, or
6176(3) the new file name does not particularly specify any mode.
6177
6178This applies to M-x set-visited-file-name as well.
6179
6180However, if you set change-major-mode-with-file-name to nil, then
6181these commands do not change the major mode.
6182
6183** M-x occur changes.
6184
6185*** If the argument to M-x occur contains upper case letters,
6186it performs a case-sensitive search.
6187
6188*** In the *Occur* buffer made by M-x occur,
6189if you type g or M-x revert-buffer, this repeats the search
6190using the same regular expression and the same buffer as before.
6191
6192** In Transient Mark mode, the region in any one buffer is highlighted
6193in just one window at a time. At first, it is highlighted in the
6194window where you set the mark. The buffer's highlighting remains in
6195that window unless you select to another window which shows the same
6196buffer--then the highlighting moves to that window.
6197
6198** The feature to suggest key bindings when you use M-x now operates
6199after the command finishes. The message suggesting key bindings
6200appears temporarily in the echo area. The previous echo area contents
6201come back after a few seconds, in case they contain useful information.
6202
6203** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
6204selected buffers, so that the default for C-x b is now based on the
6205buffers recently selected in the selected frame.
6206
6207** Outline mode changes.
6208
6209*** Outline mode now uses overlays (this is the former noutline.el).
6210
6211*** Incremental searches skip over invisible text in Outline mode.
6212
6213** When a minibuffer window is active but not the selected window, if
6214you try to use the minibuffer, you used to get a nested minibuffer.
6215Now, this not only gives an error, it also cancels the minibuffer that
6216was already active.
6217
6218The motive for this change is so that beginning users do not
6219unknowingly move away from minibuffers, leaving them active, and then
6220get confused by it.
6221
6222If you want to be able to have recursive minibuffers, you must
6223set enable-recursive-minibuffers to non-nil.
6224
6225** Changes in dynamic abbrevs.
6226
6227*** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
6228conversion. If the expansion has mixed case not counting the first
6229character, and the abbreviation matches the beginning of the expansion
6230including case, then the expansion is copied verbatim.
6231
6232The expansion is also copied verbatim if the abbreviation itself has
6233mixed case. And using SPC M-/ to copy an additional word always
6234copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is all caps.
6235
6236*** The values of `dabbrev-case-replace' and `dabbrev-case-fold-search'
6237are no longer Lisp expressions. They have simply three possible
6238values.
6239
6240`dabbrev-case-replace' has these three values: nil (don't preserve
6241case), t (do), or `case-replace' (do like M-x query-replace).
6242`dabbrev-case-fold-search' has these three values: nil (don't ignore
6243case), t (do), or `case-fold-search' (do like search).
6244
6245** Minibuffer history lists are truncated automatically now to a
6246certain length. The variable history-length specifies how long they
6247can be. The default value is 30.
6248
6249** Changes in Mail mode.
6250
6251*** The key C-x m no longer runs the `mail' command directly.
6252Instead, it runs the command `compose-mail', which invokes the mail
6253composition mechanism you have selected with the variable
6254`mail-user-agent'. The default choice of user agent is
6255`sendmail-user-agent', which gives behavior compatible with the old
6256behavior.
6257
6258C-x 4 m now runs compose-mail-other-window, and C-x 5 m runs
6259compose-mail-other-frame.
6260
6261*** While composing a reply to a mail message, from Rmail, you can use
6262the command C-c C-r to cite just the region from the message you are
6263replying to. This copies the text which is the selected region in the
6264buffer that shows the original message.
6265
6266*** The command C-c C-i inserts a file at the end of the message,
6267with separator lines around the contents.
6268
6269*** The command M-x expand-mail-aliases expands all mail aliases
6270in suitable mail headers. Emacs automatically extracts mail alias
6271definitions from your mail alias file (e.g., ~/.mailrc). You do not
6272need to expand mail aliases yourself before sending mail.
6273
6274*** New features in the mail-complete command.
6275
6276**** The mail-complete command now inserts the user's full name,
6277for local users or if that is known. The variable mail-complete-style
6278controls the style to use, and whether to do this at all.
6279Its values are like those of mail-from-style.
6280
6281**** The variable mail-passwd-command lets you specify a shell command
6282to run to fetch a set of password-entries that add to the ones in
6283/etc/passwd.
6284
6285**** The variable mail-passwd-file now specifies a list of files to read
6286to get the list of user ids. By default, one file is used:
6287/etc/passwd.
6288
6289** You can "quote" a file name to inhibit special significance of
6290special syntax, by adding `/:' to the beginning. Thus, if you have a
6291directory named `/foo:', you can prevent it from being treated as a
6292reference to a remote host named `foo' by writing it as `/:/foo:'.
6293
6294Emacs uses this new construct automatically when necessary, such as
6295when you start it with a working directory whose name might otherwise
6296be taken to be magic.
6297
6298** There is a new command M-x grep-find which uses find to select
6299files to search through, and grep to scan them. The output is
6300available in a Compile mode buffer, as with M-x grep.
6301
6302M-x grep now uses the -e option if the grep program supports that.
6303(-e prevents problems if the search pattern starts with a dash.)
6304
6305** In Dired, the & command now flags for deletion the files whose names
6306suggest they are probably not needed in the long run.
6307
6308In Dired, * is now a prefix key for mark-related commands.
6309
6310new key dired.el binding old key
6311------- ---------------- -------
6312 * c dired-change-marks c
6313 * m dired-mark m
6314 * * dired-mark-executables * (binding deleted)
6315 * / dired-mark-directories / (binding deleted)
6316 * @ dired-mark-symlinks @ (binding deleted)
6317 * u dired-unmark u
6318 * DEL dired-unmark-backward DEL
6319 * ? dired-unmark-all-files M-C-?
6320 * ! dired-unmark-all-marks
6321 * % dired-mark-files-regexp % m
6322 * C-n dired-next-marked-file M-}
6323 * C-p dired-prev-marked-file M-{
6324
6325** Rmail changes.
6326
6327*** When Rmail cannot convert your incoming mail into Babyl format, it
6328saves the new mail in the file RMAILOSE.n, where n is an integer
6329chosen to make a unique name. This way, Rmail will not keep crashing
6330each time you run it.
6331
6332*** In Rmail, the variable rmail-summary-line-count-flag now controls
6333whether to include the line count in the summary. Non-nil means yes.
6334
6335*** In Rmail summary buffers, d and C-d (the commands to delete
6336messages) now take repeat counts as arguments. A negative argument
6337means to move in the opposite direction.
6338
6339*** In Rmail, the t command now takes an optional argument which lets
6340you specify whether to show the message headers in full or pruned.
6341
6342*** In Rmail, the new command w (rmail-output-body-to-file) writes
6343just the body of the current message into a file, without the headers.
6344It takes the file name from the message subject, by default, but you
6345can edit that file name in the minibuffer before it is actually used
6346for output.
6347
6348** Gnus changes.
6349
6350*** nntp.el has been totally rewritten in an asynchronous fashion.
6351
6352*** Article prefetching functionality has been moved up into
6353Gnus.
6354
6355*** Scoring can now be performed with logical operators like
6356`and', `or', `not', and parent redirection.
6357
6358*** Article washing status can be displayed in the
6359article mode line.
6360
6361*** gnus.el has been split into many smaller files.
6362
6363*** Suppression of duplicate articles based on Message-ID.
6364
6365(setq gnus-suppress-duplicates t)
6366
6367*** New variables for specifying what score and adapt files
6368are to be considered home score and adapt files. See
6369`gnus-home-score-file' and `gnus-home-adapt-files'.
6370
6371*** Groups can inherit group parameters from parent topics.
6372
6373*** Article editing has been revamped and is now usable.
6374
6375*** Signatures can be recognized in more intelligent fashions.
6376See `gnus-signature-separator' and `gnus-signature-limit'.
6377
6378*** Summary pick mode has been made to look more nn-like.
6379Line numbers are displayed and the `.' command can be
6380used to pick articles.
6381
6382*** Commands for moving the .newsrc.eld from one server to
6383another have been added.
6384
6385 `M-x gnus-change-server'
6386
6387*** A way to specify that "uninteresting" fields be suppressed when
6388generating lines in buffers.
6389
6390*** Several commands in the group buffer can be undone with
6391`M-C-_'.
6392
6393*** Scoring can be done on words using the new score type `w'.
6394
6395*** Adaptive scoring can be done on a Subject word-by-word basis:
6396
6397 (setq gnus-use-adaptive-scoring '(word))
6398
6399*** Scores can be decayed.
6400
6401 (setq gnus-decay-scores t)
6402
6403*** Scoring can be performed using a regexp on the Date header. The
6404Date is normalized to compact ISO 8601 format first.
6405
6406*** A new command has been added to remove all data on articles from
6407the native server.
6408
6409 `M-x gnus-group-clear-data-on-native-groups'
6410
6411*** A new command for reading collections of documents
6412(nndoc with nnvirtual on top) has been added -- `M-C-d'.
6413
6414*** Process mark sets can be pushed and popped.
6415
6416*** A new mail-to-news backend makes it possible to post
6417even when the NNTP server doesn't allow posting.
6418
6419*** A new backend for reading searches from Web search engines
6420(DejaNews, Alta Vista, InReference) has been added.
6421
6422 Use the `G w' command in the group buffer to create such
6423 a group.
6424
6425*** Groups inside topics can now be sorted using the standard
6426sorting functions, and each topic can be sorted independently.
6427
6428 See the commands under the `T S' submap.
6429
6430*** Subsets of the groups can be sorted independently.
6431
6432 See the commands under the `G P' submap.
6433
6434*** Cached articles can be pulled into the groups.
6435
6436 Use the `Y c' command.
6437
6438*** Score files are now applied in a more reliable order.
6439
6440*** Reports on where mail messages end up can be generated.
6441
6442 `M-x nnmail-split-history'
6443
6444*** More hooks and functions have been added to remove junk
6445from incoming mail before saving the mail.
6446
6447 See `nnmail-prepare-incoming-header-hook'.
6448
6449*** The nnml mail backend now understands compressed article files.
6450
6451*** To enable Gnus to read/post multi-lingual articles, you must execute
6452the following code, for instance, in your .emacs.
6453
6454 (add-hook 'gnus-startup-hook 'gnus-mule-initialize)
6455
6456Then, when you start Gnus, it will decode non-ASCII text automatically
6457and show appropriate characters. (Note: if you are using gnus-mime
6458from the SEMI package, formerly known as TM, you should NOT add this
6459hook to gnus-startup-hook; gnus-mime has its own method of handling
6460this issue.)
6461
6462Since it is impossible to distinguish all coding systems
6463automatically, you may need to specify a choice of coding system for a
6464particular news group. This can be done by:
6465
6466 (gnus-mule-add-group NEWSGROUP 'CODING-SYSTEM)
6467
6468Here NEWSGROUP should be a string which names a newsgroup or a tree
6469of newsgroups. If NEWSGROUP is "XXX.YYY", all news groups under
6470"XXX.YYY" (including "XXX.YYY.ZZZ") will use the specified coding
6471system. CODING-SYSTEM specifies which coding system to use (for both
6472for reading and posting).
6473
6474CODING-SYSTEM can also be a cons cell of the form
6475 (READ-CODING-SYSTEM . POST-CODING-SYSTEM)
6476Then READ-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you read messages from the
6477newsgroups, while POST-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you post messages
6478there.
6479
6480Emacs knows the right coding systems for certain newsgroups by
6481default. Here are some of these default settings:
6482
6483 (gnus-mule-add-group "fj" 'iso-2022-7)
6484 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text" 'hz-gb-2312)
6485 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.hk" 'hz-gb-2312)
6486 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text.big5" 'cn-big5)
6487 (gnus-mule-add-group "soc.culture.vietnamese" '(nil . viqr))
6488
6489When you reply by mail to an article, these settings are ignored;
6490the mail is encoded according to sendmail-coding-system, as usual.
6491
6492** CC mode changes.
6493
6494*** If you edit primarily one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, Java)
6495code, you may want to make the CC Mode style variables have global
6496values so that you can set them directly in your .emacs file. To do
6497this, set c-style-variables-are-local-p to nil in your .emacs file.
6498Note that this only takes effect if you do it *before* cc-mode.el is
6499loaded.
6500
6501If you typically edit more than one style of C (or C++, Objective-C,
6502Java) code in a single Emacs session, you may want to make the CC Mode
6503style variables have buffer local values. By default, all buffers
6504share the same style variable settings; to make them buffer local, set
6505c-style-variables-are-local-p to t in your .emacs file. Note that you
6506must do this *before* CC Mode is loaded.
6507
6508*** The new variable c-indentation-style holds the C style name
6509of the current buffer.
6510
6511*** The variable c-block-comments-indent-p has been deleted, because
6512it is no longer necessary. C mode now handles all the supported styles
6513of block comments, with no need to say which one you will use.
6514
6515*** There is a new indentation style "python", which specifies the C
6516style that the Python developers like.
6517
6518*** There is a new c-cleanup-list option: brace-elseif-brace.
6519This says to put ...} else if (...) {... on one line,
6520just as brace-else-brace says to put ...} else {... on one line.
6521
6522** VC Changes [new]
6523
6524** In vc-retrieve-snapshot (C-x v r), if you don't specify a snapshot
6525name, it retrieves the *latest* versions of all files in the current
6526directory and its subdirectories (aside from files already locked).
6527
6528This feature is useful if your RCS directory is a link to a common
6529master directory, and you want to pick up changes made by other
6530developers.
6531
6532You can do the same thing for an individual file by typing C-u C-x C-q
6533RET in a buffer visiting that file.
6534
6535*** VC can now handle files under CVS that are being "watched" by
6536other developers. Such files are made read-only by CVS. To get a
6537writable copy, type C-x C-q in a buffer visiting such a file. VC then
6538calls "cvs edit", which notifies the other developers of it.
6539
6540*** vc-version-diff (C-u C-x v =) now suggests reasonable defaults for
6541version numbers, based on the current state of the file.
6542
6543** Calendar changes.
6544
6545A new function, list-holidays, allows you list holidays or subclasses
6546of holidays for ranges of years. Related menu items allow you do this
6547for the year of the selected date, or the following/previous years.
6548
6549** ps-print changes
6550
6551There are some new user variables for customizing the page layout.
6552
6553*** Paper size, paper orientation, columns
6554
6555The variable `ps-paper-type' determines the size of paper ps-print
6556formats for; it should contain one of the symbols:
6557`a4' `a3' `letter' `legal' `letter-small' `tabloid'
6558`ledger' `statement' `executive' `a4small' `b4' `b5'
6559It defaults to `letter'.
6560If you need other sizes, see the variable `ps-page-dimensions-database'.
6561
6562The variable `ps-landscape-mode' determines the orientation
6563of the printing on the page. nil, the default, means "portrait" mode,
6564non-nil means "landscape" mode.
6565
6566The variable `ps-number-of-columns' must be a positive integer.
6567It determines the number of columns both in landscape and portrait mode.
6568It defaults to 1.
6569
6570*** Horizontal layout
6571
6572The horizontal layout is determined by the variables
6573`ps-left-margin', `ps-inter-column', and `ps-right-margin'.
6574All are measured in points.
6575
6576*** Vertical layout
6577
6578The vertical layout is determined by the variables
6579`ps-bottom-margin', `ps-top-margin', and `ps-header-offset'.
6580All are measured in points.
6581
6582*** Headers
6583
6584If the variable `ps-print-header' is nil, no header is printed. Then
6585`ps-header-offset' is not relevant and `ps-top-margin' represents the
6586margin above the text.
6587
6588If the variable `ps-print-header-frame' is non-nil, a gaudy
6589framing box is printed around the header.
6590
6591The contents of the header are determined by `ps-header-lines',
6592`ps-show-n-of-n', `ps-left-header' and `ps-right-header'.
6593
6594The height of the header is determined by `ps-header-line-pad',
6595`ps-header-font-family', `ps-header-title-font-size' and
6596`ps-header-font-size'.
6597
6598*** Font managing
6599
6600The variable `ps-font-family' determines which font family is to be
6601used for ordinary text. Its value must be a key symbol in the alist
6602`ps-font-info-database'. You can add other font families by adding
6603elements to this alist.
6604
6605The variable `ps-font-size' determines the size of the font
6606for ordinary text. It defaults to 8.5 points.
6607
6608** hideshow changes.
6609
6610*** now supports hiding of blocks of single line comments (like // for
6611C++, ; for lisp).
6612
6613*** Support for java-mode added.
6614
6615*** When doing `hs-hide-all' it is now possible to also hide the comments
6616in the file if `hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is set.
6617
6618*** The new function `hs-hide-initial-comment' hides the the comments at
6619the beginning of the files. Finally those huge RCS logs don't stay in your
6620way! This is run by default when entering the `hs-minor-mode'.
6621
6622*** Now uses overlays instead of `selective-display', so is more
6623robust and a lot faster.
6624
6625*** A block beginning can span multiple lines.
6626
6627*** The new variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' if t, directs hideshow
6628to show only the beginning of a block when it is hidden. See the
6629documentation for more details.
6630
6631** Changes in Enriched mode.
6632
6633*** When you visit a file in enriched-mode, Emacs will make sure it is
6634filled to the current fill-column. This behavior is now independent
6635of the size of the window. When you save the file, the fill-column in
6636use is stored as well, so that the whole buffer need not be refilled
6637the next time unless the fill-column is different.
6638
6639*** use-hard-newlines is now a minor mode. When it is enabled, Emacs
6640distinguishes between hard and soft newlines, and treats hard newlines
6641as paragraph boundaries. Otherwise all newlines inserted are marked
6642as soft, and paragraph boundaries are determined solely from the text.
6643
6644** Font Lock mode
6645
6646*** Custom support
6647
6648The variables font-lock-face-attributes, font-lock-display-type and
6649font-lock-background-mode are now obsolete; the recommended way to specify the
6650faces to use for Font Lock mode is with M-x customize-group on the new custom
6651group font-lock-highlighting-faces. If you set font-lock-face-attributes in
6652your ~/.emacs file, Font Lock mode will respect its value. However, you should
6653consider converting from setting that variable to using M-x customize.
6654
6655You can still use X resources to specify Font Lock face appearances.
6656
6657*** Maximum decoration
6658
6659Fontification now uses the maximum level of decoration supported by
6660default. Previously, fontification used a mode-specific default level
6661of decoration, which is typically the minimum level of decoration
6662supported. You can set font-lock-maximum-decoration to nil
6663to get the old behavior.
6664
6665*** New support
6666
6667Support is now provided for Java, Objective-C, AWK and SIMULA modes.
6668
6669Note that Font Lock mode can be turned on without knowing exactly what modes
6670support Font Lock mode, via the command global-font-lock-mode.
6671
6672*** Configurable support
6673
6674Support for C, C++, Objective-C and Java can be more easily configured for
6675additional types and classes via the new variables c-font-lock-extra-types,
6676c++-font-lock-extra-types, objc-font-lock-extra-types and, you guessed it,
6677java-font-lock-extra-types. These value of each of these variables should be a
6678list of regexps matching the extra type names. For example, the default value
6679of c-font-lock-extra-types is ("\\sw+_t") which means fontification follows the
6680convention that C type names end in _t. This results in slower fontification.
6681
6682Of course, you can change the variables that specify fontification in whatever
6683way you wish, typically by adding regexps. However, these new variables make
6684it easier to make specific and common changes for the fontification of types.
6685
6686*** Adding highlighting patterns to existing support
6687
6688You can use the new function font-lock-add-keywords to add your own
6689highlighting patterns, such as for project-local or user-specific constructs,
6690for any mode.
6691
6692For example, to highlight `FIXME:' words in C comments, put:
6693
6694 (font-lock-add-keywords 'c-mode '(("\\<FIXME:" 0 font-lock-warning-face t)))
6695
6696in your ~/.emacs.
6697
6698*** New faces
6699
6700Font Lock now defines two new faces, font-lock-builtin-face and
6701font-lock-warning-face. These are intended to highlight builtin keywords,
6702distinct from a language's normal keywords, and objects that should be brought
6703to user attention, respectively. Various modes now use these new faces.
6704
6705*** Changes to fast-lock support mode
6706
6707The fast-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now process
6708cache files silently. You can use the new variable fast-lock-verbose, in the
6709same way as font-lock-verbose, to control this feature.
6710
6711*** Changes to lazy-lock support mode
6712
6713The lazy-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now fontify
6714according to the true syntactic context relative to other lines. You can use
6715the new variable lazy-lock-defer-contextually to control this feature. If
6716non-nil, changes to the buffer will cause subsequent lines in the buffer to be
6717refontified after lazy-lock-defer-time seconds of idle time. If nil, then only
6718the modified lines will be refontified; this is the same as the previous Lazy
6719Lock mode behaviour and the behaviour of Font Lock mode.
6720
6721This feature is useful in modes where strings or comments can span lines.
6722For example, if a string or comment terminating character is deleted, then if
6723this feature is enabled subsequent lines in the buffer will be correctly
6724refontified to reflect their new syntactic context. Previously, only the line
6725containing the deleted character would be refontified and you would have to use
6726the command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block) to refontify some lines.
6727
6728As a consequence of this new feature, two other variables have changed:
6729
6730Variable `lazy-lock-defer-driven' is renamed `lazy-lock-defer-on-scrolling'.
6731Variable `lazy-lock-defer-time' can now only be a time, i.e., a number.
6732Buffer modes for which on-the-fly deferral applies can be specified via the
6733new variable `lazy-lock-defer-on-the-fly'.
6734
6735If you set these variables in your ~/.emacs, then you may have to change those
6736settings.
6737
6738** Ada mode changes.
6739
6740*** There is now better support for using find-file.el with Ada mode.
6741If you switch between spec and body, the cursor stays in the same
6742procedure (modulo overloading). If a spec has no body file yet, but
6743you try to switch to its body file, Ada mode now generates procedure
6744stubs.
6745
6746*** There are two new commands:
6747 - `ada-make-local' : invokes gnatmake on the current buffer
6748 - `ada-check-syntax' : check syntax of current buffer.
6749
6750The user options `ada-compiler-make', `ada-make-options',
6751`ada-language-version', `ada-compiler-syntax-check', and
6752`ada-compile-options' are used within these commands.
6753
6754*** Ada mode can now work with Outline minor mode. The outline level
6755is calculated from the indenting, not from syntactic constructs.
6756Outlining does not work if your code is not correctly indented.
6757
6758*** The new function `ada-gnat-style' converts the buffer to the style of
6759formatting used in GNAT. It places two blanks after a comment start,
6760places one blank between a word end and an opening '(', and puts one
6761space between a comma and the beginning of a word.
6762
6763** Scheme mode changes.
6764
6765*** Scheme mode indentation now uses many of the facilities of Lisp
6766mode; therefore, the variables to customize it are the variables used
6767for Lisp mode which have names starting with `lisp-'. The variables
6768with names starting with `scheme-' which used to do this no longer
6769have any effect.
6770
6771If you want to use different indentation for Scheme and Lisp, this is
6772still possible, but now you must do it by adding a hook to
6773scheme-mode-hook, which could work by setting the `lisp-' indentation
6774variables as buffer-local variables.
6775
6776*** DSSSL mode is a variant of Scheme mode, for editing DSSSL scripts.
6777Use M-x dsssl-mode.
6778
6779** Changes to the emacsclient program
6780
6781*** If a socket can't be found, and environment variables LOGNAME or
6782USER are set, emacsclient now looks for a socket based on the UID
6783associated with the name. That is an emacsclient running as root
6784can connect to an Emacs server started by a non-root user.
6785
6786*** The emacsclient program now accepts an option --no-wait which tells
6787it to return immediately without waiting for you to "finish" the
6788buffer in Emacs.
6789
6790*** The new option --alternate-editor allows to specify an editor to
6791use if Emacs is not running. The environment variable
6792ALTERNATE_EDITOR can be used for the same effect; the command line
6793option takes precedence.
6794
6795** M-x eldoc-mode enables a minor mode in which the echo area
6796constantly shows the parameter list for function being called at point
6797(in Emacs Lisp and Lisp Interaction modes only).
6798
6799** C-x n d now runs the new command narrow-to-defun,
6800which narrows the accessible parts of the buffer to just
6801the current defun.
6802
6803** Emacs now handles the `--' argument in the standard way; all
6804following arguments are treated as ordinary file names.
6805
6806** On MSDOS and Windows, the bookmark file is now called _emacs.bmk,
6807and the saved desktop file is now called _emacs.desktop (truncated if
6808necessary).
6809
6810** When you kill a buffer that visits a file,
6811if there are any registers that save positions in the file,
6812these register values no longer become completely useless.
6813If you try to go to such a register with C-x j, then you are
6814asked whether to visit the file again. If you say yes,
6815it visits the file and then goes to the same position.
6816
6817** When you visit a file that changes frequently outside Emacs--for
6818example, a log of output from a process that continues to run--it may
6819be useful for Emacs to revert the file without querying you whenever
6820you visit the file afresh with C-x C-f.
6821
6822You can request this behavior for certain files by setting the
6823variable revert-without-query to a list of regular expressions. If a
6824file's name matches any of these regular expressions, find-file and
6825revert-buffer revert the buffer without asking for permission--but
6826only if you have not edited the buffer text yourself.
6827
6828** set-default-font has been renamed to set-frame-font
6829since it applies only to the current frame.
6830
6831** In TeX mode, you can use the variable tex-main-file to specify the
6832file for tex-file to run TeX on. (By default, tex-main-file is nil,
6833and tex-file runs TeX on the current visited file.)
6834
6835This is useful when you are editing a document that consists of
6836multiple files. In each of the included files, you can set up a local
6837variable list which specifies the top-level file of your document for
6838tex-main-file. Then tex-file will run TeX on the whole document
6839instead of just the file you are editing.
6840
6841** RefTeX mode
6842
6843RefTeX mode is a new minor mode with special support for \label, \ref
6844and \cite macros in LaTeX documents. RefTeX distinguishes labels of
6845different environments (equation, figure, ...) and has full support for
6846multifile documents. To use it, select a buffer with a LaTeX document and
6847turn the mode on with M-x reftex-mode. Here are the main user commands:
6848
6849C-c ( reftex-label
6850 Creates a label semi-automatically. RefTeX is context sensitive and
6851 knows which kind of label is needed.
6852
6853C-c ) reftex-reference
6854 Offers in a menu all labels in the document, along with context of the
6855 label definition. The selected label is referenced as \ref{LABEL}.
6856
6857C-c [ reftex-citation
6858 Prompts for a regular expression and displays a list of matching BibTeX
6859 database entries. The selected entry is cited with a \cite{KEY} macro.
6860
6861C-c & reftex-view-crossref
6862 Views the cross reference of a \ref or \cite command near point.
6863
6864C-c = reftex-toc
6865 Shows a table of contents of the (multifile) document. From there you
6866 can quickly jump to every section.
6867
6868Under X, RefTeX installs a "Ref" menu in the menu bar, with additional
6869commands. Press `?' to get help when a prompt mentions this feature.
6870Full documentation and customization examples are in the file
6871reftex.el. You can use the finder to view the file documentation:
6872C-h p --> tex --> reftex.el
6873
6874** Changes in BibTeX mode.
6875
6876*** Info documentation is now available.
6877
6878*** Don't allow parentheses in string constants anymore. This confused
6879both the BibTeX program and Emacs BibTeX mode.
6880
6881*** Renamed variable bibtex-mode-user-optional-fields to
6882bibtex-user-optional-fields.
6883
6884*** Removed variable bibtex-include-OPTannote
6885(use bibtex-user-optional-fields instead).
6886
6887*** New interactive functions to copy and kill fields and complete
6888entries to the BibTeX kill ring, from where they can be yanked back by
6889appropriate functions.
6890
6891*** New interactive functions for repositioning and marking of
6892entries. They are bound by default to M-C-l and M-C-h.
6893
6894*** New hook bibtex-clean-entry-hook. It is called after entry has
6895been cleaned.
6896
6897*** New variable bibtex-field-delimiters, which replaces variables
6898bibtex-field-{left|right}-delimiter.
6899
6900*** New variable bibtex-entry-delimiters to determine how entries
6901shall be delimited.
6902
6903*** Allow preinitialization of fields. See documentation of
6904bibtex-user-optional-fields, bibtex-entry-field-alist, and
6905bibtex-include-OPTkey for details.
6906
6907*** Book and InBook entries require either an author or an editor
6908field. This is now supported by bibtex.el. Alternative fields are
6909prefixed with `ALT'.
6910
6911*** New variable bibtex-entry-format, which replaces variable
6912bibtex-clean-entry-zap-empty-opts and allows specification of many
6913formatting options performed on cleaning an entry (see variable
6914documentation).
6915
6916*** Even more control on how automatic keys are generated. See
6917documentation of bibtex-generate-autokey for details. Transcriptions
6918for foreign languages other than German are now handled, too.
6919
6920*** New boolean user option bibtex-comma-after-last-field to decide if
6921comma should be inserted at end of last field.
6922
6923*** New boolean user option bibtex-align-at-equal-sign to determine if
6924alignment should be made at left side of field contents or at equal
6925signs. New user options to control entry layout (e.g. indentation).
6926
6927*** New function bibtex-fill-entry to realign entries.
6928
6929*** New function bibtex-reformat to reformat region or buffer.
6930
6931*** New function bibtex-convert-alien to convert a BibTeX database
6932from alien sources.
6933
6934*** New function bibtex-complete-key (similar to bibtex-complete-string)
6935to complete prefix to a key defined in buffer. Mainly useful in
6936crossref entries.
6937
6938*** New function bibtex-count-entries to count entries in buffer or
6939region.
6940
6941*** Added support for imenu.
6942
6943*** The function `bibtex-validate' now checks current region instead
6944of buffer if mark is active. Now it shows all errors of buffer in a
6945`compilation mode' buffer. You can use the normal commands (e.g.
6946`next-error') for compilation modes to jump to errors.
6947
6948*** New variable `bibtex-string-file-path' to determine where the files
6949from `bibtex-string-files' are searched.
6950
6951** Iso Accents mode now supports Latin-3 as an alternative.
6952
6953** The command next-error now opens blocks hidden by hideshow.
6954
6955** The function using-unix-filesystems has been replaced by the
6956functions add-untranslated-filesystem and remove-untranslated-filesystem.
6957Each of these functions takes the name of a drive letter or directory
6958as an argument.
6959
6960When a filesystem is added as untranslated, all files on it are read
6961and written in binary mode (no cr/lf translation is performed).
6962
6963** browse-url changes
6964
6965*** New methods for: Grail (browse-url-generic), MMM (browse-url-mmm),
6966Lynx in a separate xterm (browse-url-lynx-xterm) or in an Emacs window
6967(browse-url-lynx-emacs), remote W3 (browse-url-w3-gnudoit), generic
6968non-remote-controlled browsers (browse-url-generic) and associated
6969customization variables.
6970
6971*** New commands `browse-url-of-region' and `browse-url'.
6972
6973*** URLs marked up with <URL:...> (RFC1738) work if broken across
6974lines. Browsing methods can be associated with URL regexps
6975(e.g. mailto: URLs) via `browse-url-browser-function'.
6976
6977** Changes in Ediff
6978
6979*** Clicking Mouse-2 on a brief command description in Ediff control panel
6980pops up the Info file for this command.
6981
6982*** There is now a variable, ediff-autostore-merges, which controls whether
6983the result of a merge is saved in a file. By default, this is done only when
6984merge is done from a session group (eg, when merging files in two different
6985directories).
6986
6987*** Since Emacs 19.31 (this hasn't been announced before), Ediff can compare
6988and merge groups of files residing in different directories, or revisions of
6989files in the same directory.
6990
6991*** Since Emacs 19.31, Ediff can apply multi-file patches interactively.
6992The patches must be in the context format or GNU unified format. (The bug
6993related to the GNU format has now been fixed.)
6994
6995** Changes in Viper
6996
6997*** The startup file is now .viper instead of .vip
6998*** All variable/function names have been changed to start with viper-
6999 instead of vip-.
7000*** C-\ now simulates the meta-key in all Viper states.
7001*** C-z in Insert state now escapes to Vi for the duration of the next
7002Viper command. In Vi and Insert states, C-z behaves as before.
7003*** C-c \ escapes to Vi for one command if Viper is in Insert or Emacs states.
7004*** _ is no longer the meta-key in Vi state.
7005*** The variable viper-insert-state-cursor-color can be used to change cursor
7006color when Viper is in insert state.
7007*** If search lands the cursor near the top or the bottom of the window,
7008Viper pulls the window up or down to expose more context. The variable
7009viper-adjust-window-after-search controls this behavior.
7010
7011** Etags changes.
7012
7013*** In C, C++, Objective C and Java, Etags tags global variables by
7014default. The resulting tags files are inflated by 30% on average.
7015Use --no-globals to turn this feature off. Etags can also tag
7016variables which are members of structure-like constructs, but it does
7017not by default. Use --members to turn this feature on.
7018
7019*** C++ member functions are now recognized as tags.
7020
7021*** Java is tagged like C++. In addition, "extends" and "implements"
7022constructs are tagged. Files are recognised by the extension .java.
7023
7024*** Etags can now handle programs written in Postscript. Files are
7025recognised by the extensions .ps and .pdb (Postscript with C syntax).
7026In Postscript, tags are lines that start with a slash.
7027
7028*** Etags now handles Objective C and Objective C++ code. The usual C and
7029C++ tags are recognized in these languages; in addition, etags
7030recognizes special Objective C syntax for classes, class categories,
7031methods and protocols.
7032
7033*** Etags also handles Cobol. Files are recognised by the extension
7034.cobol. The tagged lines are those containing a word that begins in
7035column 8 and ends in a full stop, i.e. anything that could be a
7036paragraph name.
7037
7038*** Regexps in Etags now support intervals, as in ed or grep. The syntax of
7039an interval is \{M,N\}, and it means to match the preceding expression
7040at least M times and as many as N times.
7041
7042** The format for specifying a custom format for time-stamp to insert
7043in files has changed slightly.
7044
7045With the new enhancements to the functionality of format-time-string,
7046time-stamp-format will change to be eventually compatible with it.
7047This conversion is being done in two steps to maintain compatibility
7048with old time-stamp-format values.
7049
7050In the new scheme, alternate case is signified by the number-sign
7051(`#') modifier, rather than changing the case of the format character.
7052This feature is as yet incompletely implemented for compatibility
7053reasons.
7054
7055In the old time-stamp-format, all numeric fields defaulted to their
7056natural width. (With format-time-string, each format has a
7057fixed-width default.) In this version, you can specify the colon
7058(`:') modifier to a numeric conversion to mean "give me the historical
7059time-stamp-format width default." Do not use colon if you are
7060specifying an explicit width, as in "%02d".
7061
7062Numbers are no longer truncated to the requested width, except in the
7063case of "%02y", which continues to give a two-digit year. Digit
7064truncation probably wasn't being used for anything else anyway.
7065
7066The new formats will work with old versions of Emacs. New formats are
7067being recommended now to allow time-stamp-format to change in the
7068future to be compatible with format-time-string. The new forms being
7069recommended now will continue to work then.
7070
7071See the documentation string for the variable time-stamp-format for
7072details.
7073
7074** There are some additional major modes:
7075
7076dcl-mode, for editing VMS DCL files.
7077m4-mode, for editing files of m4 input.
7078meta-mode, for editing MetaFont and MetaPost source files.
7079
7080** In Shell mode, the command shell-copy-environment-variable lets you
7081copy the value of a specified environment variable from the subshell
7082into Emacs.
7083
7084** New Lisp packages include:
7085
7086*** battery.el displays battery status for laptops.
7087
7088*** M-x bruce (named after Lenny Bruce) is a program that might
7089be used for adding some indecent words to your email.
7090
7091*** M-x crisp-mode enables an emulation for the CRiSP editor.
7092
7093*** M-x dirtrack arranges for better tracking of directory changes
7094in shell buffers.
7095
7096*** The new library elint.el provides for linting of Emacs Lisp code.
7097See the documentation for `elint-initialize', `elint-current-buffer'
7098and `elint-defun'.
7099
7100*** M-x expand-add-abbrevs defines a special kind of abbrev which is
7101meant for programming constructs. These abbrevs expand like ordinary
7102ones, when you type SPC, but only at the end of a line and not within
7103strings or comments.
7104
7105These abbrevs can act as templates: you can define places within an
7106abbrev for insertion of additional text. Once you expand the abbrev,
7107you can then use C-x a p and C-x a n to move back and forth to these
7108insertion points. Thus you can conveniently insert additional text
7109at these points.
7110
7111*** filecache.el remembers the location of files so that you
7112can visit them by short forms of their names.
7113
7114*** find-func.el lets you find the definition of the user-loaded
7115Emacs Lisp function at point.
7116
7117*** M-x handwrite converts text to a "handwritten" picture.
7118
7119*** M-x iswitchb-buffer is a command for switching to a buffer, much like
7120switch-buffer, but it reads the argument in a more helpful way.
7121
7122*** M-x landmark implements a neural network for landmark learning.
7123
7124*** M-x locate provides a convenient interface to the `locate' program.
7125
7126*** M4 mode is a new mode for editing files of m4 input.
7127
7128*** mantemp.el creates C++ manual template instantiations
7129from the GCC error messages which indicate which instantiations are needed.
7130
7131*** mouse-copy.el provides a one-click copy and move feature.
7132You can drag a region with M-mouse-1, and it is automatically
7133inserted at point. M-Shift-mouse-1 deletes the text from its
7134original place after inserting the copy.
7135
7136*** mouse-drag.el lets you do scrolling by dragging Mouse-2
7137on the buffer.
7138
7139You click the mouse and move; that distance either translates into the
7140velocity to scroll (with mouse-drag-throw) or the distance to scroll
7141(with mouse-drag-drag). Horizontal scrolling is enabled when needed.
7142
7143Enable mouse-drag with:
7144 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-throw)
7145-or-
7146 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-drag)
7147
7148*** mspools.el is useful for determining which mail folders have
7149mail waiting to be read in them. It works with procmail.
7150
7151*** Octave mode is a major mode for editing files of input for Octave.
7152It comes with a facility for communicating with an Octave subprocess.
7153
7154*** ogonek
7155
7156The ogonek package provides functions for changing the coding of
7157Polish diacritic characters in buffers. Codings known from various
7158platforms are supported such as ISO8859-2, Mazovia, IBM Latin2, and
7159TeX. For example, you can change the coding from Mazovia to
7160ISO8859-2. Another example is a change of coding from ISO8859-2 to
7161prefix notation (in which `/a' stands for the aogonek character, for
7162instance) and vice versa.
7163
7164To use this package load it using
7165 M-x load-library [enter] ogonek
7166Then, you may get an explanation by calling one of
7167 M-x ogonek-jak -- in Polish
7168 M-x ogonek-how -- in English
7169The info specifies the commands and variables provided as well as the
7170ways of customization in `.emacs'.
7171
7172*** Interface to ph.
7173
7174Emacs provides a client interface to CCSO Nameservers (ph/qi)
7175
7176The CCSO nameserver is used in many universities to provide directory
7177services about people. ph.el provides a convenient Emacs interface to
7178these servers.
7179
7180*** uce.el is useful for replying to unsolicited commercial email.
7181
7182*** vcursor.el implements a "virtual cursor" feature.
7183You can move the virtual cursor with special commands
7184while the real cursor does not move.
7185
7186*** webjump.el is a "hot list" package which you can set up
7187for visiting your favorite web sites.
7188
7189*** M-x winner-mode is a minor mode which saves window configurations,
7190so you can move back to other configurations that you have recently used.
7191
7192** movemail change
7193
7194Movemail no longer needs to be installed setuid root in order for POP
7195mail retrieval to function properly. This is because it no longer
7196supports the RPOP (reserved-port POP) protocol; instead, it uses the
7197user's POP password to authenticate to the mail server.
7198
7199This change was made earlier, but not reported in NEWS before.
7200\f
7201* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows.
7202
7203** Changes in handling MS-DOS/MS-Windows text files.
7204
7205Emacs handles three different conventions for representing
7206end-of-line: CRLF for MSDOS, LF for Unix and GNU, and CR (used on the
7207Macintosh). Emacs determines which convention is used in a specific
7208file based on the contents of that file (except for certain special
7209file names), and when it saves the file, it uses the same convention.
7210
7211To save the file and change the end-of-line convention, you can use
7212C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) to specify a different
7213coding system for the buffer. Then, when you save the file, the newly
7214specified coding system will take effect. For example, to save with
7215LF, specify undecided-unix (or some other ...-unix coding system); to
7216save with CRLF, specify undecided-dos.
7217\f
7218* Lisp Changes in Emacs 20.1
7219
7220** Byte-compiled files made with Emacs 20 will, in general, work in
7221Emacs 19 as well, as long as the source code runs in Emacs 19. And
7222vice versa: byte-compiled files made with Emacs 19 should also run in
7223Emacs 20, as long as the program itself works in Emacs 20.
7224
7225** Windows-specific functions and variables have been renamed
7226to start with w32- instead of win32-.
7227
7228In hacker language, calling something a "win" is a form of praise. We
7229don't want to praise a non-free Microsoft system, so we don't call it
7230"win".
7231
7232** Basic Lisp changes
7233
7234*** A symbol whose name starts with a colon now automatically
7235evaluates to itself. Therefore such a symbol can be used as a constant.
7236
7237*** The defined purpose of `defconst' has been changed. It should now
7238be used only for values that should not be changed whether by a program
7239or by the user.
7240
7241The actual behavior of defconst has not been changed.
7242
7243*** There are new macros `when' and `unless'
7244
7245(when CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION (progn BODY...))
7246(unless CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION nil BODY...)
7247
7248*** Emacs now defines functions caar, cadr, cdar and cddr with their
7249usual Lisp meanings. For example, caar returns the car of the car of
7250its argument.
7251
7252*** equal, when comparing strings, now ignores their text properties.
7253
7254*** The new function `functionp' tests whether an object is a function.
7255
7256*** arrayp now returns t for char-tables and bool-vectors.
7257
7258*** Certain primitives which use characters (as integers) now get an
7259error if the integer is not a valid character code. These primitives
7260include insert-char, char-to-string, and the %c construct in the
7261`format' function.
7262
7263*** The `require' function now insists on adding a suffix, either .el
7264or .elc, to the file name. Thus, (require 'foo) will not use a file
7265whose name is just foo. It insists on foo.el or foo.elc.
7266
7267*** The `autoload' function, when the file name does not contain
7268either a directory name or the suffix .el or .elc, insists on
7269adding one of these suffixes.
7270
7271*** string-to-number now takes an optional second argument BASE
7272which specifies the base to use when converting an integer.
7273If BASE is omitted, base 10 is used.
7274
7275We have not implemented other radices for floating point numbers,
7276because that would be much more work and does not seem useful.
7277
7278*** substring now handles vectors as well as strings.
7279
7280*** The Common Lisp function eql is no longer defined normally.
7281You must load the `cl' library to define it.
7282
7283*** The new macro `with-current-buffer' lets you evaluate an expression
7284conveniently with a different current buffer. It looks like this:
7285
7286 (with-current-buffer BUFFER BODY-FORMS...)
7287
7288BUFFER is the expression that says which buffer to use.
7289BODY-FORMS say what to do in that buffer.
7290
7291*** The new primitive `save-current-buffer' saves and restores the
7292choice of current buffer, like `save-excursion', but without saving or
7293restoring the value of point or the mark. `with-current-buffer'
7294works using `save-current-buffer'.
7295
7296*** The new macro `with-temp-file' lets you do some work in a new buffer and
7297write the output to a specified file. Like `progn', it returns the value
7298of the last form.
7299
7300*** The new macro `with-temp-buffer' lets you do some work in a new buffer,
7301which is discarded after use. Like `progn', it returns the value of the
7302last form. If you wish to return the buffer contents, use (buffer-string)
7303as the last form.
7304
7305*** The new function split-string takes a string, splits it at certain
7306characters, and returns a list of the substrings in between the
7307matches.
7308
7309For example, (split-string "foo bar lose" " +") returns ("foo" "bar" "lose").
7310
7311*** The new macro with-output-to-string executes some Lisp expressions
7312with standard-output set up so that all output feeds into a string.
7313Then it returns that string.
7314
7315For example, if the current buffer name is `foo',
7316
7317(with-output-to-string
7318 (princ "The buffer is ")
7319 (princ (buffer-name)))
7320
7321returns "The buffer is foo".
7322
7323** Non-ASCII characters are now supported, if enable-multibyte-characters
7324is non-nil.
7325
7326These characters have character codes above 256. When inserted in the
7327buffer or stored in a string, they are represented as multibyte
7328characters that occupy several buffer positions each.
7329
7330*** When enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, a single character in
7331a buffer or string can be two or more bytes (as many as four).
7332
7333Buffers and strings are still made up of unibyte elements;
7334character positions and string indices are always measured in bytes.
7335Therefore, moving forward one character can increase the buffer
7336position by 2, 3 or 4. The function forward-char moves by whole
7337characters, and therefore is no longer equivalent to
7338 (lambda (n) (goto-char (+ (point) n))).
7339
7340ASCII characters (codes 0 through 127) are still single bytes, always.
7341Sequences of byte values 128 through 255 are used to represent
7342non-ASCII characters. These sequences are called "multibyte
7343characters".
7344
7345The first byte of a multibyte character is always in the range 128
7346through 159 (octal 0200 through 0237). These values are called
7347"leading codes". The second and subsequent bytes are always in the
7348range 160 through 255 (octal 0240 through 0377). The first byte, the
7349leading code, determines how many bytes long the sequence is.
7350
7351*** The function forward-char moves over characters, and therefore
7352(forward-char 1) may increase point by more than 1 if it moves over a
7353multibyte character. Likewise, delete-char always deletes a
7354character, which may be more than one buffer position.
7355
7356This means that some Lisp programs, which assume that a character is
7357always one buffer position, need to be changed.
7358
7359However, all ASCII characters are always one buffer position.
7360
7361*** The regexp [\200-\377] no longer matches all non-ASCII characters,
7362because when enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, these characters
7363have codes that are not in the range octal 200 to octal 377. However,
7364the regexp [^\000-\177] does match all non-ASCII characters,
7365guaranteed.
7366
7367*** The function char-boundary-p returns non-nil if position POS is
7368between two characters in the buffer (not in the middle of a
7369character).
7370
7371When the value is non-nil, it says what kind of character follows POS:
7372
7373 0 if POS is at an ASCII character or at the end of range,
7374 1 if POS is before a 2-byte length multi-byte form,
7375 2 if POS is at a head of 3-byte length multi-byte form,
7376 3 if POS is at a head of 4-byte length multi-byte form,
7377 4 if POS is at a head of multi-byte form of a composite character.
7378
7379*** The function char-bytes returns how many bytes the character CHAR uses.
7380
7381*** Strings can contain multibyte characters. The function
7382`length' returns the string length counting bytes, which may be
7383more than the number of characters.
7384
7385You can include a multibyte character in a string constant by writing
7386it literally. You can also represent it with a hex escape,
7387\xNNNNNNN..., using as many digits as necessary. Any character which
7388is not a valid hex digit terminates this construct. If you want to
7389follow it with a character that is a hex digit, write backslash and
7390newline in between; that will terminate the hex escape.
7391
7392*** The function concat-chars takes arguments which are characters
7393and returns a string containing those characters.
7394
7395*** The function sref access a multibyte character in a string.
7396(sref STRING INDX) returns the character in STRING at INDEX. INDEX
7397counts from zero. If INDEX is at a position in the middle of a
7398character, sref signals an error.
7399
7400*** The function chars-in-string returns the number of characters
7401in a string. This is less than the length of the string, if the
7402string contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
7403
7404*** The function chars-in-region returns the number of characters
7405in a region from BEG to END. This is less than (- END BEG) if the
7406region contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
7407
7408*** The function string-to-list converts a string to a list of
7409the characters in it. string-to-vector converts a string
7410to a vector of the characters in it.
7411
7412*** The function store-substring alters part of the contents
7413of a string. You call it as follows:
7414
7415 (store-substring STRING IDX OBJ)
7416
7417This says to alter STRING, by storing OBJ starting at index IDX in
7418STRING. OBJ may be either a character or a (smaller) string.
7419This function really does alter the contents of STRING.
7420Since it is impossible to change the length of an existing string,
7421it is an error if OBJ doesn't fit within STRING's actual length.
7422
7423*** char-width returns the width (in columns) of the character CHAR,
7424if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
7425
7426*** string-width returns the width (in columns) of the text in STRING,
7427if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
7428
7429*** truncate-string-to-width shortens a string, if necessary,
7430to fit within a certain number of columns. (Of course, it does
7431not alter the string that you give it; it returns a new string
7432which contains all or just part of the existing string.)
7433
7434(truncate-string-to-width STR END-COLUMN &optional START-COLUMN PADDING)
7435
7436This returns the part of STR up to column END-COLUMN.
7437
7438The optional argument START-COLUMN specifies the starting column.
7439If this is non-nil, then the first START-COLUMN columns of the string
7440are not included in the resulting value.
7441
7442The optional argument PADDING, if non-nil, is a padding character to be added
7443at the beginning and end the resulting string, to extend it to exactly
7444WIDTH columns. If PADDING is nil, that means do not pad; then, if STRING
7445is narrower than WIDTH, the value is equal to STRING.
7446
7447If PADDING and START-COLUMN are both non-nil, and if there is no clean
7448place in STRING that corresponds to START-COLUMN (because one
7449character extends across that column), then the padding character
7450PADDING is added one or more times at the beginning of the result
7451string, so that its columns line up as if it really did start at
7452column START-COLUMN.
7453
7454*** When the functions in the list after-change-functions are called,
7455the third argument is the number of bytes in the pre-change text, not
7456necessarily the number of characters. It is, in effect, the
7457difference in buffer position between the beginning and the end of the
7458changed text, before the change.
7459
7460*** The characters Emacs uses are classified in various character
7461sets, each of which has a name which is a symbol. In general there is
7462one character set for each script, not for each language.
7463
7464**** The function charsetp tests whether an object is a character set name.
7465
7466**** The variable charset-list holds a list of character set names.
7467
7468**** char-charset, given a character code, returns the name of the character
7469set that the character belongs to. (The value is a symbol.)
7470
7471**** split-char, given a character code, returns a list containing the
7472name of the character set, followed by one or two byte-values
7473which identify the character within that character set.
7474
7475**** make-char, given a character set name and one or two subsequent
7476byte-values, constructs a character code. This is roughly the
7477opposite of split-char.
7478
7479**** find-charset-region returns a list of the character sets
7480of all the characters between BEG and END.
7481
7482**** find-charset-string returns a list of the character sets
7483of all the characters in a string.
7484
7485*** Here are the Lisp facilities for working with coding systems
7486and specifying coding systems.
7487
7488**** The function coding-system-list returns a list of all coding
7489system names (symbols). With optional argument t, it returns a list
7490of all distinct base coding systems, not including variants.
7491(Variant coding systems are those like latin-1-dos, latin-1-unix
7492and latin-1-mac which specify the end-of-line conversion as well
7493as what to do about code conversion.)
7494
7495**** coding-system-p tests a symbol to see if it is a coding system
7496name. It returns t if so, nil if not.
7497
7498**** file-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
7499for certain file names. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
7500except that the PATTERN is matched against the file name.
7501
7502Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
7503which file names the element applies to. PATTERN should be a regexp
7504to match against a file name.
7505
7506VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
7507a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
7508decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
7509to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
7510systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
7511specifies the coding system for encoding.
7512
7513If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
7514or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
7515
7516**** The variable network-coding-system-alist specifies
7517the coding system to use for network sockets.
7518
7519Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
7520which network sockets the element applies to. PATTERN should be
7521either a port number or a regular expression matching some network
7522service names.
7523
7524VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
7525a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
7526decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
7527to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
7528systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
7529specifies the coding system for encoding.
7530
7531If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
7532or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
7533
7534**** process-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
7535for certain subprocess. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
7536except that the PATTERN is matched against the program name used to
7537start the subprocess.
7538
7539**** The variable default-process-coding-system specifies the coding
7540systems to use for subprocess (and net connection) input and output,
7541when nothing else specifies what to do. The value is a cons cell
7542(OUTPUT-CODING . INPUT-CODING). OUTPUT-CODING applies to output
7543to the subprocess, and INPUT-CODING applies to input from it.
7544
7545**** The variable coding-system-for-write, if non-nil, specifies the
7546coding system to use for writing a file, or for output to a synchronous
7547subprocess.
7548
7549It also applies to any asynchronous subprocess or network connection,
7550but in a different way: the value of coding-system-for-write when you
7551start the subprocess or connection affects that subprocess or
7552connection permanently or until overridden.
7553
7554The variable coding-system-for-write takes precedence over
7555file-coding-system-alist, process-coding-system-alist and
7556network-coding-system-alist, and all other methods of specifying a
7557coding system for output. But most of the time this variable is nil.
7558It exists so that Lisp programs can bind it to a specific coding
7559system for one operation at a time.
7560
7561**** coding-system-for-read applies similarly to input from
7562files, subprocesses or network connections.
7563
7564**** The function process-coding-system tells you what
7565coding systems(s) an existing subprocess is using.
7566The value is a cons cell,
7567 (DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM . ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM)
7568where DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for decoding output from
7569the subprocess, and ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for encoding
7570input to the subprocess.
7571
7572**** The function set-process-coding-system can be used to
7573change the coding systems in use for an existing subprocess.
7574
7575** Emacs has a new facility to help users manage the many
7576customization options. To make a Lisp program work with this facility,
7577you need to use the new macros defgroup and defcustom.
7578
7579You use defcustom instead of defvar, for defining a user option
7580variable. The difference is that you specify two additional pieces of
7581information (usually): the "type" which says what values are
7582legitimate, and the "group" which specifies the hierarchy for
7583customization.
7584
7585Thus, instead of writing
7586
7587 (defvar foo-blurgoze nil
7588 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely.")
7589
7590you would now write this:
7591
7592 (defcustom foo-blurgoze nil
7593 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely."
7594 :type 'boolean
7595 :group foo)
7596
7597The type `boolean' means that this variable has only
7598two meaningful states: nil and non-nil. Other type values
7599describe other possibilities; see the manual for Custom
7600for a description of them.
7601
7602The "group" argument is used to specify a group which the option
7603should belong to. You define a new group like this:
7604
7605 (defgroup ispell nil
7606 "Spell checking using Ispell."
7607 :group 'processes)
7608
7609The "group" argument in defgroup specifies the parent group. The root
7610group is called `emacs'; it should not contain any variables itself,
7611but only other groups. The immediate subgroups of `emacs' correspond
7612to the keywords used by C-h p. Under these subgroups come
7613second-level subgroups that belong to individual packages.
7614
7615Each Emacs package should have its own set of groups. A simple
7616package should have just one group; a more complex package should
7617have a hierarchy of its own groups. The sole or root group of a
7618package should be a subgroup of one or more of the "keyword"
7619first-level subgroups.
7620
7621** New `widget' library for inserting UI components in buffers.
7622
7623This library, used by the new custom library, is documented in a
7624separate manual that accompanies Emacs.
7625
7626** easy-mmode
7627
7628The easy-mmode package provides macros and functions that make
7629developing minor modes easier. Roughly, the programmer has to code
7630only the functionality of the minor mode. All the rest--toggles,
7631predicate, and documentation--can be done in one call to the macro
7632`easy-mmode-define-minor-mode' (see the documentation). See also
7633`easy-mmode-define-keymap'.
7634
7635** Text property changes
7636
7637*** The `intangible' property now works on overlays as well as on a
7638text property.
7639
7640*** The new functions next-char-property-change and
7641previous-char-property-change scan through the buffer looking for a
7642place where either a text property or an overlay might change. The
7643functions take two arguments, POSITION and LIMIT. POSITION is the
7644starting position for the scan. LIMIT says where to stop the scan.
7645
7646If no property change is found before LIMIT, the value is LIMIT. If
7647LIMIT is nil, scan goes to the beginning or end of the accessible part
7648of the buffer. If no property change is found, the value is the
7649position of the beginning or end of the buffer.
7650
7651*** In the `local-map' text property or overlay property, the property
7652value can now be a symbol whose function definition is a keymap. This
7653is an alternative to using the keymap itself.
7654
7655** Changes in invisibility features
7656
7657*** Isearch can now temporarily show parts of the buffer which are
7658hidden by an overlay with a invisible property, when the search match
7659is inside that portion of the buffer. To enable this the overlay
7660should have a isearch-open-invisible property which is a function that
7661would be called having the overlay as an argument, the function should
7662make the overlay visible.
7663
7664During incremental search the overlays are shown by modifying the
7665invisible and intangible properties, if beside this more actions are
7666needed the overlay should have a isearch-open-invisible-temporary
7667which is a function. The function is called with 2 arguments: one is
7668the overlay and the second is nil when it should show the overlay and
7669t when it should hide it.
7670
7671*** add-to-invisibility-spec, remove-from-invisibility-spec
7672
7673Modes that use overlays to hide portions of a buffer should set the
7674invisible property of the overlay to the mode's name (or another symbol)
7675and modify the `buffer-invisibility-spec' to include that symbol.
7676Use `add-to-invisibility-spec' and `remove-from-invisibility-spec' to
7677manipulate the `buffer-invisibility-spec'.
7678Here is an example of how to do this:
7679
7680 ;; If we want to display an ellipsis:
7681 (add-to-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
7682 ;; If you don't want ellipsis:
7683 (add-to-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
7684
7685 ...
7686 (overlay-put (make-overlay beginning end) 'invisible 'my-symbol)
7687
7688 ...
7689 ;; When done with the overlays:
7690 (remove-from-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
7691 ;; Or respectively:
7692 (remove-from-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
7693
7694** Changes in syntax parsing.
7695
7696*** The syntax-directed buffer-scan functions (such as
7697`parse-partial-sexp', `forward-word' and similar functions) can now
7698obey syntax information specified by text properties, if the variable
7699`parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil.
7700
7701If the value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is nil, the behavior
7702is as before: the syntax-table of the current buffer is always
7703used to determine the syntax of the character at the position.
7704
7705When `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil, the syntax of a
7706character in the buffer is calculated thus:
7707
7708 a) if the `syntax-table' text-property of that character
7709 is a cons, this cons becomes the syntax-type;
7710
7711 Valid values of `syntax-table' text-property are: nil, a valid
7712 syntax-table, and a valid syntax-table element, i.e.,
7713 a cons cell of the form (SYNTAX-CODE . MATCHING-CHAR).
7714
7715 b) if the character's `syntax-table' text-property
7716 is a syntax table, this syntax table is used
7717 (instead of the syntax-table of the current buffer) to
7718 determine the syntax type of the character.
7719
7720 c) otherwise the syntax-type is determined by the syntax-table
7721 of the current buffer.
7722
7723*** The meaning of \s in regular expressions is also affected by the
7724value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties'. The details are the same as
7725for the syntax-directed buffer-scan functions.
7726
7727*** There are two new syntax-codes, `!' and `|' (numeric values 14
7728and 15). A character with a code `!' starts a comment which is ended
7729only by another character with the same code (unless quoted). A
7730character with a code `|' starts a string which is ended only by
7731another character with the same code (unless quoted).
7732
7733These codes are mainly meant for use as values of the `syntax-table'
7734text property.
7735
7736*** The function `parse-partial-sexp' has new semantics for the sixth
7737arg COMMENTSTOP. If it is `syntax-table', parse stops after the start
7738of a comment or a string, or after end of a comment or a string.
7739
7740*** The state-list which the return value from `parse-partial-sexp'
7741(and can also be used as an argument) now has an optional ninth
7742element: the character address of the start of last comment or string;
7743nil if none. The fourth and eighth elements have special values if the
7744string/comment is started by a "!" or "|" syntax-code.
7745
7746*** Since new features of `parse-partial-sexp' allow a complete
7747syntactic parsing, `font-lock' no longer supports
7748`font-lock-comment-start-regexp'.
7749
7750** Changes in face features
7751
7752*** The face functions are now unconditionally defined in Emacs, even
7753if it does not support displaying on a device that supports faces.
7754
7755*** The function face-documentation returns the documentation string
7756of a face (or nil if it doesn't have one).
7757
7758*** The function face-bold-p returns t if a face should be bold.
7759set-face-bold-p sets that flag.
7760
7761*** The function face-italic-p returns t if a face should be italic.
7762set-face-italic-p sets that flag.
7763
7764*** You can now specify foreground and background colors for text
7765by adding elements of the form (foreground-color . COLOR-NAME)
7766and (background-color . COLOR-NAME) to the list of faces in
7767the `face' property (either the character's text property or an
7768overlay property).
7769
7770This means that you no longer need to create named faces to use
7771arbitrary colors in a Lisp package.
7772
7773** Changes in file-handling functions
7774
7775*** File-access primitive functions no longer discard an extra redundant
7776directory name from the beginning of the file name. In other words,
7777they no longer do anything special with // or /~. That conversion
7778is now done only in substitute-in-file-name.
7779
7780This makes it possible for a Lisp program to open a file whose name
7781begins with ~.
7782
7783*** If copy-file is unable to set the date of the output file,
7784it now signals an error with the condition file-date-error.
7785
7786*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
7787the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a list of integers.
7788
7789*** insert-file-contents can now read from a special file,
7790as long as the arguments VISIT and REPLACE are nil.
7791
7792*** The RAWFILE arg to find-file-noselect, if non-nil, now suppresses
7793character code conversion as well as other things.
7794
7795Meanwhile, this feature does work with remote file names
7796(formerly it did not).
7797
7798*** Lisp packages which create temporary files should use the TMPDIR
7799environment variable to decide which directory to put them in.
7800
7801*** interpreter-mode-alist elements now specify regexps
7802instead of constant strings.
7803
7804*** expand-file-name no longer treats `//' or `/~' specially. It used
7805to delete all the text of a file name up through the first slash of
7806any `//' or `/~' sequence. Now it passes them straight through.
7807
7808substitute-in-file-name continues to treat those sequences specially,
7809in the same way as before.
7810
7811*** The variable `format-alist' is more general now.
7812The FROM-FN and TO-FN in a format definition can now be strings
7813which specify shell commands to use as filters to perform conversion.
7814
7815*** The new function access-file tries to open a file, and signals an
7816error if that fails. If the open succeeds, access-file does nothing
7817else, and returns nil.
7818
7819*** The function insert-directory now signals an error if the specified
7820directory cannot be listed.
7821
7822** Changes in minibuffer input
7823
7824*** The functions read-buffer, read-variable, read-command, read-string
7825read-file-name, read-from-minibuffer and completing-read now take an
7826additional argument which specifies the default value. If this
7827argument is non-nil, it should be a string; that string is used in two
7828ways:
7829
7830 It is returned if the user enters empty input.
7831 It is available through the history command M-n.
7832
7833*** The functions read-string, read-from-minibuffer,
7834read-no-blanks-input and completing-read now take an additional
7835argument INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. If this is non-nil, then the
7836minibuffer inherits the current input method and the setting of
7837enable-multibyte-characters from the previously current buffer.
7838
7839In an interactive spec, you can use M instead of s to read an
7840argument in this way.
7841
7842*** All minibuffer input functions discard text properties
7843from the text you enter in the minibuffer, unless the variable
7844minibuffer-allow-text-properties is non-nil.
7845
7846** Echo area features
7847
7848*** Clearing the echo area now runs the normal hook
7849echo-area-clear-hook. Note that the echo area can be used while the
7850minibuffer is active; in that case, the minibuffer is still active
7851after the echo area is cleared.
7852
7853*** The function current-message returns the message currently displayed
7854in the echo area, or nil if there is none.
7855
7856** Keyboard input features
7857
7858*** tty-erase-char is a new variable that reports which character was
7859set up as the terminal's erase character when time Emacs was started.
7860
7861*** num-nonmacro-input-events is the total number of input events
7862received so far from the terminal. It does not count those generated
7863by keyboard macros.
7864
7865** Frame-related changes
7866
7867*** make-frame runs the normal hook before-make-frame-hook just before
7868creating a frame, and just after creating a frame it runs the abnormal
7869hook after-make-frame-functions with the new frame as arg.
7870
7871*** The new hook window-configuration-change-hook is now run every time
7872the window configuration has changed. The frame whose configuration
7873has changed is the selected frame when the hook is run.
7874
7875*** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
7876selected buffers, in its buffer-list frame parameter, so that the
7877value of other-buffer is now based on the buffers recently displayed
7878in the selected frame.
7879
7880*** The value of the frame parameter vertical-scroll-bars
7881is now `left', `right' or nil. A non-nil value specifies
7882which side of the window to put the scroll bars on.
7883
7884** X Windows features
7885
7886*** You can examine X resources for other applications by binding
7887x-resource-class around a call to x-get-resource. The usual value of
7888x-resource-class is "Emacs", which is the correct value for Emacs.
7889
7890*** In menus, checkboxes and radio buttons now actually work.
7891The menu displays the current status of the box or button.
7892
7893*** The function x-list-fonts now takes an optional fourth argument
7894MAXIMUM which sets a limit on how many matching fonts to return.
7895A smaller value of MAXIMUM makes the function faster.
7896
7897If the only question is whether *any* font matches the pattern,
7898it is good to supply 1 for this argument.
7899
7900** Subprocess features
7901
7902*** A reminder: it is no longer necessary for subprocess filter
7903functions and sentinels to do save-match-data, because Emacs does this
7904automatically.
7905
7906*** The new function shell-command-to-string executes a shell command
7907and returns the output from the command as a string.
7908
7909*** The new function process-contact returns t for a child process,
7910and (HOSTNAME SERVICE) for a net connection.
7911
7912** An error in running pre-command-hook or post-command-hook
7913does clear the variable to nil. The documentation was wrong before.
7914
7915** In define-key-after, if AFTER is t, the new binding now always goes
7916at the end of the keymap. If the keymap is a menu, this means it
7917goes after the other menu items.
7918
7919** If you have a program that makes several changes in the same area
7920of the buffer, you can use the macro combine-after-change-calls
7921around that Lisp code to make it faster when after-change hooks
7922are in use.
7923
7924The macro arranges to call the after-change functions just once for a
7925series of several changes--if that seems safe.
7926
7927Don't alter the variables after-change-functions and
7928after-change-function within the body of a combine-after-change-calls
7929form.
7930
7931** If you define an abbrev (with define-abbrev) whose EXPANSION
7932is not a string, then the abbrev does not expand in the usual sense,
7933but its hook is still run.
7934
7935** Normally, the Lisp debugger is not used (even if you have enabled it)
7936for errors that are handled by condition-case.
7937
7938If you set debug-on-signal to a non-nil value, then the debugger is called
7939regardless of whether there is a handler for the condition. This is
7940useful for debugging problems that happen inside of a condition-case.
7941
7942This mode of operation seems to be unreliable in other ways. Errors that
7943are normal and ought to be handled, perhaps in timers or process
7944filters, will instead invoke the debugger. So don't say you weren't
7945warned.
7946
7947** The new variable ring-bell-function lets you specify your own
7948way for Emacs to "ring the bell".
7949
7950** If run-at-time's TIME argument is t, the action is repeated at
7951integral multiples of REPEAT from the epoch; this is useful for
7952functions like display-time.
7953
7954** You can use the function locate-library to find the precise file
7955name of a Lisp library. This isn't new, but wasn't documented before.
7956
7957** Commands for entering view mode have new optional arguments that
7958can be used from Lisp. Low-level entrance to and exit from view mode
7959is done by functions view-mode-enter and view-mode-exit.
7960
7961** batch-byte-compile-file now makes Emacs return a nonzero status code
7962if there is an error in compilation.
7963
7964** pop-to-buffer, switch-to-buffer-other-window and
7965switch-to-buffer-other-frame now accept an additional optional
7966argument NORECORD, much like switch-to-buffer. If it is non-nil,
7967they don't put the buffer at the front of the buffer list.
7968
7969** If your .emacs file leaves the *scratch* buffer non-empty,
7970Emacs does not display the startup message, so as to avoid changing
7971the *scratch* buffer.
7972
7973** The new function regexp-opt returns an efficient regexp to match a string.
7974The arguments are STRINGS and (optionally) PAREN. This function can be used
7975where regexp matching or searching is intensively used and speed is important,
7976e.g., in Font Lock mode.
7977
7978** The variable buffer-display-count is local to each buffer,
7979and is incremented each time the buffer is displayed in a window.
7980It starts at 0 when the buffer is created.
7981
7982** The new function compose-mail starts composing a mail message
7983using the user's chosen mail composition agent (specified with the
7984variable mail-user-agent). It has variants compose-mail-other-window
7985and compose-mail-other-frame.
7986
7987** The `user-full-name' function now takes an optional parameter which
7988can either be a number (the UID) or a string (the login name). The
7989full name of the specified user will be returned.
7990
7991** Lisp packages that load files of customizations, or any other sort
7992of user profile, should obey the variable init-file-user in deciding
7993where to find it. They should load the profile of the user name found
7994in that variable. If init-file-user is nil, meaning that the -q
7995option was used, then Lisp packages should not load the customization
7996files at all.
7997
7998** format-time-string now allows you to specify the field width
7999and type of padding. This works as in printf: you write the field
8000width as digits in the middle of a %-construct. If you start
8001the field width with 0, it means to pad with zeros.
8002
8003For example, %S normally specifies the number of seconds since the
8004minute; %03S means to pad this with zeros to 3 positions, %_3S to pad
8005with spaces to 3 positions. Plain %3S pads with zeros, because that
8006is how %S normally pads to two positions.
8007
8008** thing-at-point now supports a new kind of "thing": url.
8009
8010** imenu.el changes.
8011
8012You can now specify a function to be run when selecting an
8013item from menu created by imenu.
8014
8015An example of using this feature: if we define imenu items for the
8016#include directives in a C file, we can open the included file when we
8017select one of those items.
8018\f
8019* Emacs 19.34 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
8020\f
8021* Changes in Emacs 19.33.
8022
8023** Bibtex mode no longer turns on Auto Fill automatically. (No major
8024mode should do that--it is the user's choice.)
8025
8026** The variable normal-auto-fill-function specifies the function to
8027use for auto-fill-function, if and when Auto Fill is turned on.
8028Major modes can set this locally to alter how Auto Fill works.
8029\f
8030* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.32
8031
8032** C-x f with no argument now signals an error.
8033To set the fill column at the current column, use C-u C-x f.
8034
8035** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
8036conversion. If you type the abbreviation with mixed case, and it
8037matches the beginning of the expansion including case, then the
8038expansion is copied verbatim. Using SPC M-/ to copy an additional
8039word always copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is
8040all caps.
8041
8042** On a non-windowing terminal, which can display only one Emacs frame
8043at a time, creating a new frame with C-x 5 2 also selects that frame.
8044
8045When using a display that can show multiple frames at once, C-x 5 2
8046does make the frame visible, but does not select it. This is the same
8047as in previous Emacs versions.
8048
8049** You can use C-x 5 2 to create multiple frames on MSDOS, just as on a
8050non-X terminal on Unix. Of course, only one frame is visible at any
8051time, since your terminal doesn't have the ability to display multiple
8052frames.
8053
8054** On Windows, set win32-pass-alt-to-system to a non-nil value
8055if you would like tapping the Alt key to invoke the Windows menu.
8056This feature is not enabled by default; since the Alt key is also the
8057Meta key, it is too easy and painful to activate this feature by
8058accident.
8059
8060** The command apply-macro-to-region-lines repeats the last defined
8061keyboard macro once for each complete line within the current region.
8062It does this line by line, by moving point to the beginning of that
8063line and then executing the macro.
8064
8065This command is not new, but was never documented before.
8066
8067** You can now use Mouse-1 to place the region around a string constant
8068(something surrounded by doublequote characters or other delimiter
8069characters of like syntax) by double-clicking on one of the delimiting
8070characters.
8071
8072** Font Lock mode
8073
8074*** Font Lock support modes
8075
8076Font Lock can be configured to use Fast Lock mode and Lazy Lock mode (see
8077below) in a flexible way. Rather than adding the appropriate function to the
8078hook font-lock-mode-hook, you can use the new variable font-lock-support-mode
8079to control which modes have Fast Lock mode or Lazy Lock mode turned on when
8080Font Lock mode is enabled.
8081
8082For example, to use Fast Lock mode when Font Lock mode is turned on, put:
8083
8084 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'fast-lock-mode)
8085
8086in your ~/.emacs.
8087
8088*** lazy-lock
8089
8090The lazy-lock package speeds up Font Lock mode by making fontification occur
8091only when necessary, such as when a previously unfontified part of the buffer
8092becomes visible in a window. When you create a buffer with Font Lock mode and
8093Lazy Lock mode turned on, the buffer is not fontified. When certain events
8094occur (such as scrolling), Lazy Lock makes sure that the visible parts of the
8095buffer are fontified. Lazy Lock also defers on-the-fly fontification until
8096Emacs has been idle for a given amount of time.
8097
8098To use this package, put in your ~/.emacs:
8099
8100 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'lazy-lock-mode)
8101
8102To control the package behaviour, see the documentation for `lazy-lock-mode'.
8103
8104** Changes in BibTeX mode.
8105
8106*** For all entries allow spaces and tabs between opening brace or
8107paren and key.
8108
8109*** Non-escaped double-quoted characters (as in `Sch"of') are now
8110supported.
8111
8112** Gnus changes.
8113
8114Gnus, the Emacs news reader, has undergone further rewriting. Many new
8115commands and variables have been added. There should be no
8116significant incompatibilities between this Gnus version and the
8117previously released version, except in the message composition area.
8118
8119Below is a list of the more user-visible changes. Coding changes
8120between Gnus 5.1 and 5.2 are more extensive.
8121
8122*** A new message composition mode is used. All old customization
8123variables for mail-mode, rnews-reply-mode and gnus-msg are now
8124obsolete.
8125
8126*** Gnus is now able to generate "sparse" threads -- threads where
8127missing articles are represented by empty nodes.
8128
8129 (setq gnus-build-sparse-threads 'some)
8130
8131*** Outgoing articles are stored on a special archive server.
8132
8133 To disable this: (setq gnus-message-archive-group nil)
8134
8135*** Partial thread regeneration now happens when articles are
8136referred.
8137
8138*** Gnus can make use of GroupLens predictions:
8139
8140 (setq gnus-use-grouplens t)
8141
8142*** A trn-line tree buffer can be displayed.
8143
8144 (setq gnus-use-trees t)
8145
8146*** An nn-like pick-and-read minor mode is available for the summary
8147buffers.
8148
8149 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-mode-hook 'gnus-pick-mode)
8150
8151*** In binary groups you can use a special binary minor mode:
8152
8153 `M-x gnus-binary-mode'
8154
8155*** Groups can be grouped in a folding topic hierarchy.
8156
8157 (add-hook 'gnus-group-mode-hook 'gnus-topic-mode)
8158
8159*** Gnus can re-send and bounce mail.
8160
8161 Use the `S D r' and `S D b'.
8162
8163*** Groups can now have a score, and bubbling based on entry frequency
8164is possible.
8165
8166 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-exit-hook 'gnus-summary-bubble-group)
8167
8168*** Groups can be process-marked, and commands can be performed on
8169groups of groups.
8170
8171*** Caching is possible in virtual groups.
8172
8173*** nndoc now understands all kinds of digests, mail boxes, rnews news
8174batches, ClariNet briefs collections, and just about everything else.
8175
8176*** Gnus has a new backend (nnsoup) to create/read SOUP packets.
8177
8178*** The Gnus cache is much faster.
8179
8180*** Groups can be sorted according to many criteria.
8181
8182 For instance: (setq gnus-group-sort-function 'gnus-group-sort-by-rank)
8183
8184*** New group parameters have been introduced to set list-address and
8185expiration times.
8186
8187*** All formatting specs allow specifying faces to be used.
8188
8189*** There are several more commands for setting/removing/acting on
8190process marked articles on the `M P' submap.
8191
8192*** The summary buffer can be limited to show parts of the available
8193articles based on a wide range of criteria. These commands have been
8194bound to keys on the `/' submap.
8195
8196*** Articles can be made persistent -- as an alternative to saving
8197articles with the `*' command.
8198
8199*** All functions for hiding article elements are now toggles.
8200
8201*** Article headers can be buttonized.
8202
8203 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-add-buttons-to-head)
8204
8205*** All mail backends support fetching articles by Message-ID.
8206
8207*** Duplicate mail can now be treated properly. See the
8208`nnmail-treat-duplicates' variable.
8209
8210*** All summary mode commands are available directly from the article
8211buffer.
8212
8213*** Frames can be part of `gnus-buffer-configuration'.
8214
8215*** Mail can be re-scanned by a daemonic process.
8216
8217*** Gnus can make use of NoCeM files to filter spam.
8218
8219 (setq gnus-use-nocem t)
8220
8221*** Groups can be made permanently visible.
8222
8223 (setq gnus-permanently-visible-groups "^nnml:")
8224
8225*** Many new hooks have been introduced to make customizing easier.
8226
8227*** Gnus respects the Mail-Copies-To header.
8228
8229*** Threads can be gathered by looking at the References header.
8230
8231 (setq gnus-summary-thread-gathering-function
8232 'gnus-gather-threads-by-references)
8233
8234*** Read articles can be stored in a special backlog buffer to avoid
8235refetching.
8236
8237 (setq gnus-keep-backlog 50)
8238
8239*** A clean copy of the current article is always stored in a separate
8240buffer to allow easier treatment.
8241
8242*** Gnus can suggest where to save articles. See `gnus-split-methods'.
8243
8244*** Gnus doesn't have to do as much prompting when saving.
8245
8246 (setq gnus-prompt-before-saving t)
8247
8248*** gnus-uu can view decoded files asynchronously while fetching
8249articles.
8250
8251 (setq gnus-uu-grabbed-file-functions 'gnus-uu-grab-view)
8252
8253*** Filling in the article buffer now works properly on cited text.
8254
8255*** Hiding cited text adds buttons to toggle hiding, and how much
8256cited text to hide is now customizable.
8257
8258 (setq gnus-cited-lines-visible 2)
8259
8260*** Boring headers can be hidden.
8261
8262 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-hide-boring-headers)
8263
8264*** Default scoring values can now be set from the menu bar.
8265
8266*** Further syntax checking of outgoing articles have been added.
8267
8268The Gnus manual has been expanded. It explains all these new features
8269in greater detail.
8270\f
8271* Lisp Changes in Emacs 19.32
8272
8273** The function set-visited-file-name now accepts an optional
8274second argument NO-QUERY. If it is non-nil, then the user is not
8275asked for confirmation in the case where the specified file already
8276exists.
8277
8278** The variable print-length applies to printing vectors and bitvectors,
8279as well as lists.
8280
8281** The new function keymap-parent returns the parent keymap
8282of a given keymap.
8283
8284** The new function set-keymap-parent specifies a new parent for a
8285given keymap. The arguments are KEYMAP and PARENT. PARENT must be a
8286keymap or nil.
8287
8288** Sometimes menu keymaps use a command name, a symbol, which is really
8289an automatically generated alias for some other command, the "real"
8290name. In such a case, you should give that alias symbol a non-nil
8291menu-alias property. That property tells the menu system to look for
8292equivalent keys for the real name instead of equivalent keys for the
8293alias.
8294\f
8295* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.31
8296
8297** Freedom of the press restricted in the United States.
8298
8299Emacs has been censored in accord with the Communications Decency Act.
8300This includes removing some features of the doctor program. That law
8301was described by its supporters as a ban on pornography, but it bans
8302far more than that. The Emacs distribution has never contained any
8303pornography, but parts of it were nonetheless prohibited.
8304
8305For information on US government censorship of the Internet, and what
8306you can do to bring back freedom of the press, see the web site
8307`http://www.vtw.org/'.
8308
8309** A note about C mode indentation customization.
8310
8311The old (Emacs 19.29) ways of specifying a C indentation style
8312do not normally work in the new implementation of C mode.
8313It has its own methods of customizing indentation, which are
8314much more powerful than the old C mode. See the Editing Programs
8315chapter of the manual for details.
8316
8317However, you can load the library cc-compat to make the old
8318customization variables take effect.
8319
8320** Marking with the mouse.
8321
8322When you mark a region with the mouse, the region now remains
8323highlighted until the next input event, regardless of whether you are
8324using M-x transient-mark-mode.
8325
8326** Improved Windows NT/95 support.
8327
8328*** Emacs now supports scroll bars on Windows NT and Windows 95.
8329
8330*** Emacs now supports subprocesses on Windows 95. (Subprocesses used
8331to work on NT only and not on 95.)
8332
8333*** There are difficulties with subprocesses, though, due to problems
8334in Windows, beyond the control of Emacs. They work fine as long as
8335you run Windows applications. The problems arise when you run a DOS
8336application in a subprocesses. Since current shells run as DOS
8337applications, these problems are significant.
8338
8339If you run a DOS application in a subprocess, then the application is
8340likely to busy-wait, which means that your machine will be 100% busy.
8341However, if you don't mind the temporary heavy load, the subprocess
8342will work OK as long as you tell it to terminate before you start any
8343other DOS application as a subprocess.
8344
8345Emacs is unable to terminate or interrupt a DOS subprocess.
8346You have to do this by providing input directly to the subprocess.
8347
8348If you run two DOS applications at the same time in two separate
8349subprocesses, even if one of them is asynchronous, you will probably
8350have to reboot your machine--until then, it will remain 100% busy.
8351Windows simply does not cope when one Windows process tries to run two
8352separate DOS subprocesses. Typing CTL-ALT-DEL and then choosing
8353Shutdown seems to work although it may take a few minutes.
8354
8355** M-x resize-minibuffer-mode.
8356
8357This command, not previously mentioned in NEWS, toggles a mode in
8358which the minibuffer window expands to show as many lines as the
8359minibuffer contains.
8360
8361** `title' frame parameter and resource.
8362
8363The `title' X resource now specifies just the frame title, nothing else.
8364It does not affect the name used for looking up other X resources.
8365It works by setting the new `title' frame parameter, which likewise
8366affects just the displayed title of the frame.
8367
8368The `name' parameter continues to do what it used to do:
8369it specifies the frame name for looking up X resources,
8370and also serves as the default for the displayed title
8371when the `title' parameter is unspecified or nil.
8372
8373** Emacs now uses the X toolkit by default, if you have a new
8374enough version of X installed (X11R5 or newer).
8375
8376** When you compile Emacs with the Motif widget set, Motif handles the
8377F10 key by activating the menu bar. To avoid confusion, the usual
8378Emacs binding of F10 is replaced with a no-op when using Motif.
8379
8380If you want to be able to use F10 in Emacs, you can rebind the Motif
8381menubar to some other key which you don't use. To do so, add
8382something like this to your X resources file. This example rebinds
8383the Motif menu bar activation key to S-F12:
8384
8385 Emacs*defaultVirtualBindings: osfMenuBar : Shift<Key>F12
8386
8387** In overwrite mode, DEL now inserts spaces in most cases
8388to replace the characters it "deletes".
8389
8390** The Rmail summary now shows the number of lines in each message.
8391
8392** Rmail has a new command M-x unforward-rmail-message, which extracts
8393a forwarded message from the message that forwarded it. To use it,
8394select a message which contains a forwarded message and then type the command.
8395It inserts the forwarded message as a separate Rmail message
8396immediately after the selected one.
8397
8398This command also undoes the textual modifications that are standardly
8399made, as part of forwarding, by Rmail and other mail reader programs.
8400
8401** Turning off saving of .saves-... files in your home directory.
8402
8403Each Emacs session writes a file named .saves-... in your home
8404directory to record which files M-x recover-session should recover.
8405If you exit Emacs normally with C-x C-c, it deletes that file. If
8406Emacs or the operating system crashes, the file remains for M-x
8407recover-session.
8408
8409You can turn off the writing of these files by setting
8410auto-save-list-file-name to nil. If you do this, M-x recover-session
8411will not work.
8412
8413Some previous Emacs versions failed to delete these files even on
8414normal exit. This is fixed now. If you are thinking of turning off
8415this feature because of past experiences with versions that had this
8416bug, it would make sense to check whether you still want to do so
8417now that the bug is fixed.
8418
8419** Changes to Version Control (VC)
8420
8421There is a new variable, vc-follow-symlinks. It indicates what to do
8422when you visit a link to a file that is under version control.
8423Editing the file through the link bypasses the version control system,
8424which is dangerous and probably not what you want.
8425
8426If this variable is t, VC follows the link and visits the real file,
8427telling you about it in the echo area. If it is `ask' (the default),
8428VC asks for confirmation whether it should follow the link. If nil,
8429the link is visited and a warning displayed.
8430
8431** iso-acc.el now lets you specify a choice of language.
8432Languages include "latin-1" (the default) and "latin-2" (which
8433is designed for entering ISO Latin-2 characters).
8434
8435There are also choices for specific human languages such as French and
8436Portuguese. These are subsets of Latin-1, which differ in that they
8437enable only the accent characters needed for particular language.
8438The other accent characters, not needed for the chosen language,
8439remain normal.
8440
8441** Posting articles and sending mail now has M-TAB completion on various
8442header fields (Newsgroups, To, CC, ...).
8443
8444Completion in the Newsgroups header depends on the list of groups
8445known to your news reader. Completion in the Followup-To header
8446offers those groups which are in the Newsgroups header, since
8447Followup-To usually just holds one of those.
8448
8449Completion in fields that hold mail addresses works based on the list
8450of local users plus your aliases. Additionally, if your site provides
8451a mail directory or a specific host to use for any unrecognized user
8452name, you can arrange to query that host for completion also. (See the
8453documentation of variables `mail-directory-process' and
8454`mail-directory-stream'.)
8455
8456** A greatly extended sgml-mode offers new features such as (to be configured)
8457skeletons with completing read for tags and attributes, typing named
8458characters including optionally all 8bit characters, making tags invisible
8459with optional alternate display text, skipping and deleting tag(pair)s.
8460
8461Note: since Emacs' syntax feature cannot limit the special meaning of ', " and
8462- to inside <>, for some texts the result, especially of font locking, may be
8463wrong (see `sgml-specials' if you get wrong results).
8464
8465The derived html-mode configures this with tags and attributes more or
8466less HTML3ish. It also offers optional quick keys like C-c 1 for
8467headline or C-c u for unordered list (see `html-quick-keys'). Edit /
8468Text Properties / Face or M-g combinations create tags as applicable.
8469Outline minor mode is supported and level 1 font-locking tries to
8470fontify tag contents (which only works when they fit on one line, due
8471to a limitation in font-lock).
8472
8473External viewing via browse-url can occur automatically upon saving.
8474
8475** M-x imenu-add-to-menubar now adds to the menu bar for the current
8476buffer only. If you want to put an Imenu item in the menu bar for all
8477buffers that use a particular major mode, use the mode hook, as in
8478this example:
8479
8480 (add-hook 'emacs-lisp-mode-hook
8481 '(lambda () (imenu-add-to-menubar "Index")))
8482
8483** Changes in BibTeX mode.
8484
8485*** Field names may now contain digits, hyphens, and underscores.
8486
8487*** Font Lock mode is now supported.
8488
8489*** bibtex-make-optional-field is no longer interactive.
8490
8491*** If bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is non-nil, inserting new
8492entries is now done with a faster algorithm. However, inserting
8493will fail in this case if the buffer contains invalid entries or
8494isn't in sorted order, so you should finish each entry with C-c C-c
8495(bibtex-close-entry) after you have inserted or modified it.
8496The default value of bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is nil.
8497
8498*** Function `show-all' is no longer bound to a key, since C-u C-c C-q
8499does the same job.
8500
8501*** Entries with quotes inside quote-delimited fields (as `author =
8502"Stefan Sch{\"o}f"') are now supported.
8503
8504*** Case in field names doesn't matter anymore when searching for help
8505text.
8506
8507** Font Lock mode
8508
8509*** Global Font Lock mode
8510
8511Font Lock mode can be turned on globally, in buffers that support it, by the
8512new command global-font-lock-mode. You can use the new variable
8513font-lock-global-modes to control which modes have Font Lock mode automagically
8514turned on. By default, this variable is set so that Font Lock mode is turned
8515on globally where the buffer mode supports it.
8516
8517For example, to automagically turn on Font Lock mode where supported, put:
8518
8519 (global-font-lock-mode t)
8520
8521in your ~/.emacs.
8522
8523*** Local Refontification
8524
8525In Font Lock mode, editing a line automatically refontifies that line only.
8526However, if your change alters the syntactic context for following lines,
8527those lines remain incorrectly fontified. To refontify them, use the new
8528command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block).
8529
8530In certain major modes, M-g M-g refontifies the entire current function.
8531(The variable font-lock-mark-block-function controls how to find the
8532current function.) In other major modes, M-g M-g refontifies 16 lines
8533above and below point.
8534
8535With a prefix argument N, M-g M-g refontifies N lines above and below point.
8536
8537** Follow mode
8538
8539Follow mode is a new minor mode combining windows showing the same
8540buffer into one tall "virtual window". The windows are typically two
8541side-by-side windows. Follow mode makes them scroll together as if
8542they were a unit. To use it, go to a frame with just one window,
8543split it into two side-by-side windows using C-x 3, and then type M-x
8544follow-mode.
8545
8546M-x follow-mode turns off Follow mode if it is already enabled.
8547
8548To display two side-by-side windows and activate Follow mode, use the
8549command M-x follow-delete-other-windows-and-split.
8550
8551** hide-show changes.
8552
8553The hooks hs-hide-hooks and hs-show-hooks have been renamed
8554to hs-hide-hook and hs-show-hook, to follow the convention for
8555normal hooks.
8556
8557** Simula mode now has a menu containing the most important commands.
8558The new command simula-indent-exp is bound to C-M-q.
8559
8560** etags can now handle programs written in Erlang. Files are
8561recognised by the extensions .erl and .hrl. The tagged lines are
8562those that begin a function, record, or macro.
8563
8564** MSDOS Changes
8565
8566*** It is now possible to compile Emacs with the version 2 of DJGPP.
8567Compilation with DJGPP version 1 also still works.
8568
8569*** The documentation of DOS-specific aspects of Emacs was rewritten
8570and expanded; see the ``MS-DOS'' node in the on-line docs.
8571
8572*** Emacs now uses ~ for backup file names, not .bak.
8573
8574*** You can simulate mouse-3 on two-button mice by simultaneously
8575pressing both mouse buttons.
8576
8577*** A number of packages and commands which previously failed or had
8578restricted functionality on MS-DOS, now work. The most important ones
8579are:
8580
8581**** Printing (both with `M-x lpr-buffer' and with `ps-print' package)
8582now works.
8583
8584**** `Ediff' works (in a single-frame mode).
8585
8586**** `M-x display-time' can be used on MS-DOS (due to the new
8587implementation of Emacs timers, see below).
8588
8589**** `Dired' supports Unix-style shell wildcards.
8590
8591**** The `c-macro-expand' command now works as on other platforms.
8592
8593**** `M-x recover-session' works.
8594
8595**** `M-x list-colors-display' displays all the available colors.
8596
8597**** The `TPU-EDT' package works.
8598\f
8599* Lisp changes in Emacs 19.31.
8600
8601** The function using-unix-filesystems on Windows NT and Windows 95
8602tells Emacs to read and write files assuming that they reside on a
8603remote Unix filesystem. No CR/LF translation is done on any files in
8604this case. Invoking using-unix-filesystems with t activates this
8605behavior, and invoking it with any other value deactivates it.
8606
8607** Change in system-type and system-configuration values.
8608
8609The value of system-type on a Linux-based GNU system is now `lignux',
8610not `linux'. This means that some programs which use `system-type'
8611need to be changed. The value of `system-configuration' will also
8612be different.
8613
8614It is generally recommended to use `system-configuration' rather
8615than `system-type'.
8616
8617See the file LINUX-GNU in this directory for more about this.
8618
8619** The functions shell-command and dired-call-process
8620now run file name handlers for default-directory, if it has them.
8621
8622** Undoing the deletion of text now restores the positions of markers
8623that pointed into or next to the deleted text.
8624
8625** Timers created with run-at-time now work internally to Emacs, and
8626no longer use a separate process. Therefore, they now work more
8627reliably and can be used for shorter time delays.
8628
8629The new function run-with-timer is a convenient way to set up a timer
8630to run a specified amount of time after the present. A call looks
8631like this:
8632
8633 (run-with-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
8634
8635SECS says how many seconds should elapse before the timer happens.
8636It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the timer
8637becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments ARGS.
8638
8639REPEAT gives the interval for repeating the timer (measured in
8640seconds). It may be an integer or a floating point number. nil or 0
8641means don't repeat at all--call FUNCTION just once.
8642
8643*** with-timeout provides an easy way to do something but give
8644up if too much time passes.
8645
8646 (with-timeout (SECONDS TIMEOUT-FORMS...) BODY...)
8647
8648This executes BODY, but gives up after SECONDS seconds.
8649If it gives up, it runs the TIMEOUT-FORMS and returns the value
8650of the last one of them. Normally it returns the value of the last
8651form in BODY.
8652
8653*** You can now arrange to call a function whenever Emacs is idle for
8654a certain length of time. To do this, call run-with-idle-timer. A
8655call looks like this:
8656
8657 (run-with-idle-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
8658
8659SECS says how many seconds of idleness should elapse before the timer
8660runs. It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the
8661timer becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments
8662ARGS.
8663
8664Emacs becomes idle whenever it finishes executing a keyboard or mouse
8665command. It remains idle until it receives another keyboard or mouse
8666command.
8667
8668REPEAT, if non-nil, means this timer should be activated again each
8669time Emacs becomes idle and remains idle for SECS seconds The timer
8670does not repeat if Emacs *remains* idle; it runs at most once after
8671each time Emacs becomes idle.
8672
8673If REPEAT is nil, the timer runs just once, the first time Emacs is
8674idle for SECS seconds.
8675
8676*** post-command-idle-hook is now obsolete; you shouldn't use it at
8677all, because it interferes with the idle timer mechanism. If your
8678programs use post-command-idle-hook, convert them to use idle timers
8679instead.
8680
8681*** y-or-n-p-with-timeout lets you ask a question but give up if
8682there is no answer within a certain time.
8683
8684 (y-or-n-p-with-timeout PROMPT SECONDS DEFAULT-VALUE)
8685
8686asks the question PROMPT (just like y-or-n-p). If the user answers
8687within SECONDS seconds, it returns the answer that the user gave.
8688Otherwise it gives up after SECONDS seconds, and returns DEFAULT-VALUE.
8689
8690** Minor change to `encode-time': you can now pass more than seven
8691arguments. If you do that, the first six arguments have the usual
8692meaning, the last argument is interpreted as the time zone, and the
8693arguments in between are ignored.
8694
8695This means that it works to use the list returned by `decode-time' as
8696the list of arguments for `encode-time'.
8697
8698** The default value of load-path now includes the directory
8699/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp In addition to
8700/usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp. You can use this new directory for
8701site-specific Lisp packages that belong with a particular Emacs
8702version.
8703
8704It is not unusual for a Lisp package that works well in one Emacs
8705version to cause trouble in another. Sometimes packages need updating
8706for incompatible changes; sometimes they look at internal data that
8707has changed; sometimes the package has been installed in Emacs itself
8708and the installed version should be used. Whatever the reason for the
8709problem, this new feature makes it easier to solve.
8710
8711** When your program contains a fixed file name (like .completions or
8712.abbrev.defs), the file name usually needs to be different on operating
8713systems with limited file name syntax.
8714
8715Now you can avoid ad-hoc conditionals by using the function
8716convert-standard-filename to convert the file name to a proper form
8717for each operating system. Here is an example of use, from the file
8718completions.el:
8719
8720(defvar save-completions-file-name
8721 (convert-standard-filename "~/.completions")
8722 "*The filename to save completions to.")
8723
8724This sets the variable save-completions-file-name to a value that
8725depends on the operating system, because the definition of
8726convert-standard-filename depends on the operating system. On
8727Unix-like systems, it returns the specified file name unchanged. On
8728MS-DOS, it adapts the name to fit the limitations of that system.
8729
8730** The interactive spec N now returns the numeric prefix argument
8731rather than the raw prefix argument. (It still reads a number using the
8732minibuffer if there is no prefix argument at all.)
8733
8734** When a process is deleted, this no longer disconnects the process
8735marker from its buffer position.
8736
8737** The variable garbage-collection-messages now controls whether
8738Emacs displays a message at the beginning and end of garbage collection.
8739The default is nil, meaning there are no messages.
8740
8741** The variable debug-ignored-errors specifies certain kinds of errors
8742that should not enter the debugger. Its value is a list of error
8743condition symbols and/or regular expressions. If the error has any
8744of the condition symbols listed, or if any of the regular expressions
8745matches the error message, then that error does not enter the debugger,
8746regardless of the value of debug-on-error.
8747
8748This variable is initialized to match certain common but uninteresting
8749errors that happen often during editing.
8750
8751** The new function error-message-string converts an error datum
8752into its error message. The error datum is what condition-case
8753puts into the variable, to describe the error that happened.
8754
8755** Anything that changes which buffer appears in a given window
8756now runs the window-scroll-functions for that window.
8757
8758** The new function get-buffer-window-list returns a list of windows displaying
8759a buffer. The function is called with the buffer (a buffer object or a buffer
8760name) and two optional arguments specifying the minibuffer windows and frames
8761to search. Therefore this function takes optional args like next-window etc.,
8762and not get-buffer-window.
8763
8764** buffer-substring now runs the hook buffer-access-fontify-functions,
8765calling each function with two arguments--the range of the buffer
8766being accessed. buffer-substring-no-properties does not call them.
8767
8768If you use this feature, you should set the variable
8769buffer-access-fontified-property to a non-nil symbol, which is a
8770property name. Then, if all the characters in the buffer range have a
8771non-nil value for that property, the buffer-access-fontify-functions
8772are not called. When called, these functions should put a non-nil
8773property on the text that they fontify, so that they won't get called
8774over and over for the same text.
8775
8776** Changes in lisp-mnt.el
8777
8778*** The lisp-mnt package can now recognize file headers that are written
8779in the formats used by the `what' command and the RCS `ident' command:
8780
8781;; @(#) HEADER: text
8782;; $HEADER: text $
8783
8784in addition to the normal
8785
8786;; HEADER: text
8787
8788*** The commands lm-verify and lm-synopsis are now interactive. lm-verify
8789checks that the library file has proper sections and headers, and
8790lm-synopsis extracts first line "synopsis'"information.
8791
8792
a933dad1 8793\f
3787e12e 8794* For older news, see the file ONEWS
a933dad1
DL
8795
8796----------------------------------------------------------------------
8797Copyright information:
8798
424d8b44 8799Copyright (C) 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
8800
8801 Permission is granted to anyone to make or distribute verbatim copies
8802 of this document as received, in any medium, provided that the
8803 copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved,
8804 thus giving the recipient permission to redistribute in turn.
8805
8806 Permission is granted to distribute modified versions
8807 of this document, or of portions of it,
8808 under the above conditions, provided also that they
8809 carry prominent notices stating who last changed them.
8810\f
8811Local variables:
8812mode: outline
8813paragraph-separate: "[ \f]*$"
8814end: